owner`s manual

owner`s manual
SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL
SEAT recommends
Castrol EDGE Professional
Toledo Inglés
­­
(05.16)
Inglés 6JA012720BF (05.16)
6JA012720BF
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Toledo
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in certain markets.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
® Because this is a general manual for the
Toledo, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not
included in all types or variants of the model;
they may vary or be modified depending on
the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
>>The section is continued on the follow-
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
Emergency information on a given page
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle except when otherwise indicated.
ing page.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain relevant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
Important warnings on a given page
This manual is divided into six large parts,
which are:
Detailed contents on a given page
1. The essentials
General information on a given page
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
2. Safety
3. Emergencies
4. Operation
5. Tips
6. Technical data
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.16
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to
familiarise yourself with your vehicle.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board
documentation to the new owner, as it
should be kept with the vehicle.
information, which is detailed in the corresponding chapters.
You can access the information in this manual using:
synonyms to help you find information.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of
the vehicle, its correct handling will help preserve its value.
● Thematic table of contents that follows the
For safety reasons, always note the information concerning accessories, modifications
and part replacements.
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
manual’s general chapter structure.
● Visual table of contents that uses graphics
● Alphabetical index with many terms and
WARNING
Read and always observe safety information concerning the passenger's front airbag ››› page 73, Important information
regarding the front passenger's airbag.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
The essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior view (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . .
5
5
6
7
8
9
9
11
14
16
18
18
21
23
26
31
32
34
36
39
43
43
44
44
46
49
50
51
53
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
55
55
55
Correct position for passengers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . . .
How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . .
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
60
61
61
64
65
66
66
69
71
72
72
74
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
75
75
75
76
78
80
80
83
86
87
89
91
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the rear lights (on the side panel) . .
Changing tail lights (on the rear lid) . . . . . . . . .
Changing the bulb on the number plate . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . .
System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
93
92
94
94
98
99
99
Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing of electric windows . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . .
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . .
Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning (manual)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning) . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes and brake servo systems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
100
104
104
104
105
107
112
113
115
116
116
122
123
124
126
127
127
128
131
131
137
138
141
142
142
144
145
147
149
149
152
154
156
157
161
3
Table of Contents
Engine management and exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . .
cruise speed (Cruise control)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring system Front Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tiredness detection (break recommendation)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing bracket device for trailer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
164
166
167
167
171
174
176
181
182
184
184
186
192
192
192
193
199
199
202
205
208
209
210
211
215
215
218
219
220
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . .
4
221
221
222
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
224
225
231
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
The essentials
Exterior view
1
2
3
››› page 39
››› page 50
››› page 11
4
5
6
››› page 9
››› page 44
››› page 10
7
››› page 39
5
The essentials
Exterior view
1
2
3
6
››› page 40
››› page 40
››› page 43
4
5
6
››› page 41
››› page 40
››› page 41
7
8
9
››› page 41
››› page 75
››› page 45
10
››› page 137
The essentials
Interior view (left-hand drive)
1
2
3
4
››› page 13
››› page 18
››› page 19
››› page 31
5
6
7
8
››› page 32
››› page 20
››› page 23
››› page 19
››› page 21
››› page 14
11 ››› page 36
12 ››› page 18
9
10
››› page 34
››› page 11
15 ››› page 11
16 ››› page 43
13
14
››› page 11
››› page 12
19 ››› page 13
17
18
7
The essentials
Interior view (right-hand drive)
1
2
3
4
8
››› page 19
››› page 31
››› page 19
››› page 21
5
6
7
8
››› page 20
››› page 23
››› page 32
››› page 18
››› page 13
››› page 14
11 ››› page 36
12 ››› page 11
9
10
››› page 34
››› page 13
15 ››› page 11
16 ››› page 12
13
14
››› page 18
››› page 43
19 ››› page 11
17
18
The essentials
How it works
Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the
key
Unlocking and locking
● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button.
Doors
Unlocking and locking the driver's
door
● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button.
● Unlocking the rear lid: press the 
››› Fig. 1 button until all the turn signals on
the vehicle briefly light up.
Locking and unlocking with the central locking switch
● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. The
warning lamp on the button will light up.
None of the doors can be opened from the
outside. The doors can be opened from the
inside by pulling the inside door handle.
Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons.
● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. The
warning lamp on the button will switch off.



›››
in Unlocking and locking the vehicle
on page 105
Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.
If the central locking system should fail to operate, the driver door can still be locked and
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
● Unfold the vehicle key shaft.
● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening
››› page 104
in the cover on the driver door handle from
below ››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover
upwards.
››› page 9, ››› page 10
● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder
to unlock or lock the vehicle.
Special Characteristics
Fig. 2 Centre console: central locking switch.
● The anti-theft alarm will remain active when
vehicles are unlocked. However, it is not triggered ›››  page 107.
»
9
The essentials
● After the driver door is opened, you have
15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once
this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
the direction of the arrow until horizontal (on
the other direction on the right-hand door).
● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-
● Replace the cap.
mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and
deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the
vehicle is locked manually using the key
shaft ›››  page 107.
● Insert the key in the slot B and turn it in
Once the door has been locked, it can no longer be opened from the outside. The door
can be opened from the inside by pulling the
door handle.



›››
in Rear lid on page 114
››› page 113
››› page 10
Manual release of the rear lid
Rear lid
Locking manually
Fig. 6 Luggage compartment: access to manual release.
Fig. 5 Rear lid: opening from the outside.
Fig. 4 Rear door: manual locking
On the front of a door with no lock cylinder
there is an emergency locking device that is
only visible when the door is open.
Locking
● Remove the cap A
10
››› Fig. 4.
● Opening the rear lid: Pull on the release
lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 5. The rear lid opens
automatically.
● Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the
handles on the interior lining and close it by
pushing gently.
The rear lid can be unlocked manually from
inside in the event of an emergency.
● Insert the key in the opening in the lining
of the rear lid and move the key in the direction of the arrow until the lock is released.
The essentials
Bonnet


›››
in Introduction on page 202
››› page 202
Electric windows*


›››
in Operation of the electric windows
on page 115
››› page 115
Before driving
Manually adjusting the front seats
Fig. 8 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the windows.
● Opening the window: Press the  button.
Fig. 7 Unlocking the bonnet.
● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under
the dashboard ››› Fig. 7
1
.
● Lifting up the bonnet: press the release
catch under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 7
The arrester hook under the bonnet is released.
2
.
Fig. 9 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.
● Closing the window: Pull the  button.
1
Forward/back: pull the lever and move
the seat forwards or backwards.
Buttons on the driver door
2
Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.
3
Tilting the backrest: pull the lever back.
1
Window on the front left door
2
Window on the front right door
3
Window on the rear left door
● The bonnet can be opened. Release the
4
Window on the rear right door
bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.
5
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons in the rear doors.

›››
in Introduction on page 127
11
The essentials
Adjusting the head restraints
Adjustment of the seat belt
Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and head restraint
positions, viewed from front and the side.
Fig. 10 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-
To adjust the seat belt around your shoulders, adjust the height of the seats.
straint.
Grab the sides of the head restraints with
both hands and push upwards to the desired
position. To lower it, repeat the same action,
pressing the 1 button on the side.


›››
The shoulder part of the seat belt should be
well centred over it, never over the neck. The
seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the
upper part of the body.
in head restraints on page 128
Fig. 11 Positioning and removing the seat
››› page 59, ››› page 128
belt buckle.
The lap part of the seat belt lies across the
pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat
belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pelvis.


12
››› page 62
››› page 64
The essentials
Seat belt tensioners
During a collision, the seat belts on the front
seats are retracted automatically.
The tensioner can be triggered only once.


›››
in Service and disposal of belt tensioners on page 66
››› page 65
side (L, left) and the passenger side (R,
right) to the direction desired.



›››
››› page 126
Fig. 13 Detail of the driver door: control for
Fig. 14 Lever in the lower left side of the
steering column.
L/R Turning the knob to the desired position, adjust the mirrors on the driver
in Adjusting the steering wheel position on page 57
in Exterior mirrors on page 126
Adjusting the steering wheel
Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob
to the corresponding position:
›››
Depending on the equipment fitted on
the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
according to the outside temperature.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
the exterior mirror.

Adjusting the position of the steering wheel:
Pull the ››› Fig. 14 1 lever down, move the
steering wheel to the desired position and lift
the lever back up until it locks.
13
The essentials
Airbags
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the driver and the front
passenger additional protection for the head
and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision.
Front airbags
Their special design allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant
puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are protected by the airbag. After the
collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to
allow visibility.

›››
in Front airbags on page 69
Deactivating the front passenger front
airbagdeactivating the airbag
Fig. 16 Airbag covers reacting when the front
airbags are triggered.
Fig. 15 Driver airbag in the steering wheel
and front passenger airbag in the dash panel
The front airbag for the driver is located in
the steering wheel ››› Fig. 15  and the front
passenger airbag is located in the dash panel ››› Fig. 15 . Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
When the driver and front passenger airbags
are deployed, the covers remain attached to
the steering wheel and dashboard, respectively ››› Fig. 16.
14
Fig. 17 Front passenger front airbag switch.
The essentials
To deactivate the front passenger front airbag:
Side airbags*
● Open the glove compartment on the front
passenger side.
● Insert the key blade into the slot provided
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce
the risk of injury to passengers to the areas
of the body facing the impact. In addition to
the normal protection from the front seat
belts, passengers are also held fast in the
event of a side collision, and this is how
these airbags provide maximum protection.
in the deactivation switch.
● Approximately ¾ of the length of the key
blade remains inserted (the maximum).
● Turn the key blade, changing its position to
. Do not force it. If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as
it will go.
Fig. 18 Side airbag in driver's seat.

● Finally, check the control lamp on the in-
strument panel where it shows  
   the following should appear .


In conjunction with the seat belts, the side
airbag system provides additional protection
for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision ›››  page 61, The whys
and wherefores of seat belts.
›››
in Side airbags* on page 69
›››
in Front passenger front airbag
switch on page 72
››› page 71
Fig. 19 Illustration of completely inflated side
airbag on left side of vehicle.
The side airbags are located in the driver's
seat and front passenger seat backrests
››› Fig. 18. The locations are identified by the
text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the
backrests.
15
The essentials
Head-protection airbags*
and upper body in the event of a severe side
collision ››› page 15.

›››
in Curtain airbags* on page 70
Child seats
Fig. 20 Location of head-protection airbags.
Important information regarding the
front passenger's airbag
Fig. 23 On the rear frame of the passenger
side door: airbag sticker.
A sticker with important information about
the passenger airbag is located on the passenger's sun visor and/or on the passenger
side door frame.


Fig. 21 Deployed head-protection airbags.
The head-protection airbags are located on
both sides in the interior above the doors
››› Fig. 20 and are identified with the text
“AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the headprotection airbag system gives the vehicle
occupants additional protection for the head
16
›››
in Important information regarding
the front passenger's airbag on page 73
››› page 73
Fig. 22 Passenger's side sun visor: airbag
sticker.
Possible ways to secure child seats
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or
front passenger seat in the following ways:
● Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured
with a seat belt.
The essentials
● Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can be
fastened without seatbelts, using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system, using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* securing rings
››› page 17.
Weight
group
The systems include the child restraint system mounting with an upper retaining strap
(Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on
the seat.

Seat locations
Front passengera)
Rear
outer
Rear
centre
Group 0
<10 kg
U*
U/L
U
Group 0+
<13 kg
U*
U/L
U
Group I
9-18 kg
U*
U/L
U
Group II/III
15-36 kg
U*
U
U
›››
in Safety instructions on page 74
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether child seat
mounting system*
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether*
system can be secured quickly, easily and
safely on the rear outer seats.
When removing or fitting the child seat,
please be sure to follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
● Move the rear seat as far to the rear as it
will go.
a)
Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child
seats.
U:
Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age category
(universal retention systems are those
fitted using the adult seat belt).
*:
Move the front passenger seat as far
back as possible, as high as possible
and always disable the airbag.
L:
Suitable for retention systems using the
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* anchors.
Fig. 25 Top Tether* securing ring.
● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” reFig. 24 ISOFIX securing rings.
taining rings until the child seat can be heard
to engage. If the child seat is equipped with
Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to the
correspondent ring. Observe the manufacturer's instructions.
● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-
sure that it is secure.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on
each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings
are secured to the seat frame and, in others,
they are secured to the rear floor. Access to
»
17
The essentials
the “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear seat
backrest and the seat cushioning. The Top
Tether* rings are located at the rear of the
backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat
backrest or in the boot).
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
attachment system are available from Technical Services.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove
the key from the ignition and turn the wheel
until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic
gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P position in order to remove the key. If necessary,
press the locking key on the selector lever
and release it again.
● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key
›››
in Safety instructions on page 74
Starting the vehicle
Ignition lock
into the ignition and turn it at the same time
as the steering wheel in the direction indicated by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn
the steering wheel, it may be because it is
locked.
Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow
plugs reheating
● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2
position.
● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key automatically returns to the 2 position. Do not
press the accelerator.
Start-Stop System*
When you stop and release the clutch pedal,
the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.
The ignition remains switched on.


›››
in Introduction on page 149
››› page 149
Lights and visibility
Light switch
● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1
position.
● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat
when the ignition is switched on
Starting the engine
● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all
Fig. 26 Ignition key positions.
Switch ignition on: Place the key in the ignition and start the engine.
18
the way down and move the gearbox lever into neutral.
● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal
and move the selector lever to the P position
or into N.
Fig. 27 Dash panel: light control.
The essentials
Turn the switch to the required position
››› Fig. 27.
Symbol
Ignition switched off
Ignition is switched on

Fog lights, dipped
beam and side
lights off.
Light off or daytime
driving light on.
The “Coming home”
and “Leaving
home” guide lights
may be switched
on.
Automatic control of
dipped beam and daytime running light.


Side light on.

Dipped beam headlight off
Turn signal and main beam lever
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 28 Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 29 Dash panel: switch for hazard warning lights.
More the lever to the required position:
Dipped beam switched on.
1
Right turn signal: Right-hand parking
light (ignition switched off).
 Front fog lights: move the switch to the
first position, from positions ,  or .
2
Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
 Rear fog light: move the switch completely
from positions ,  or .
3
Main beam switched on: Control lamp 
lit up on the instrument panel.
Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or
turn it to the  position.
4
Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is
pushed. Control lamp  lit up.


Switched on, for example:
● When approaching a traffic jam
● In an emergency
● The vehicle has broken down
● When towing or being towed

››› page 121
Lever all the way down to switch it off.
›››
in Introduction on page 116
››› page 116

››› page 118
19
The essentials
Interior lights
Knob


Fig. 30 Detail of headliner: version 1
Function
More the lever to the required position:
Switches door contact control on (central position).
The interior lights come on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is
opened or the key is removed from the ignition.
The lights go off a few seconds after all the
doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the
ignition is switched on.
0

1

2
3


4

Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold
the lever down for more time to increase
the wipe frequency.
5

Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer
function is activated by pushing the lever
forwards, and simultaneously the windscreen wipers start.
6

Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper
will wipe the window approximately every
six seconds.
7

The rear window wash function is activated by pressing the lever, and the rear wiper starts simultaneously.
Turning the reading light on and off

››› page 122
Windscreen wipers and window wiper
blade
Windscreen wiper off.
Windscreen wipers interval wipe.
Using the control ››› Fig. 32 A adjust the
interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Slow wipe.
Continuous wipe.
Fig. 31 Detail of headliner: version 2
Knob
Function


Switches interior lights off.
Switches interior lights on.
Fig. 32 Operating the windscreen wiper and
rear wiper
20



›››
in Introduction on page 124
››› page 124
››› page 53
The essentials
Easy Connect
CAR menu settings (Setup)
Fig. 33 Easy Connect: Main menu
To select the settings menus, press the Easy
Connect  button and the Setup function
button.
The actual number of menus available and
the name of the various options in these menus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics
and equipment.
● Switch the ignition on.
Fig. 34 Easy Connect: CAR menu
● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it
on.
When you press the menu button, the last selected menu will always be displayed.
● Press the system's MENU button and then
the system's  ››› Fig. 33 button or  button to go to the CAR menu ››› Fig. 34.
When the function button check box is activated , the function is active.
● Press the function button Setup to open the
menu Vehicle settings ››› Fig. 34.
● To select a function in the menu, press the
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing the
BACK menus.
desired button.
Menu
Submenu
Possible setting
Description
ESC system
–
Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC)
››› page 154
Tyre pressure monitoring
Tyre pressure storing (Calibration)
››› page 219
Winter tyres
Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value
››› page 220
Tyres
»
21
The essentials
Menu
Submenu
Possible setting
Description
Front Assist (ambient traffic
monitoring system)
Activation/deactivation: monitoring system, advance warning, distance warning display
››› page 176
City emergency braking function
Activation/deactivation of the City emergency braking function.
››› page 180
Fatigue detection
Activation/deactivation
››› page 182
ParkPilot
Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound settings,
adjust volume
››› page 167
Vehicle interior lighting
Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting
››› page 122
Coming home/Leaving home
function
Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function
››› page 121
Daytime driving light
Activation/deactivation
››› page 118
Mirrors
Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after parking
››› page 126
Windscreen wipers
Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing
››› page 124
Radio-operated remote control
Convenience open function
››› page 104
Central locking system
Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation
››› page 107
Multifunction
display
–
Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consumers,
ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average speed, speeding warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from start”, restore data
“total calculation”
››› page 23
Date and time
–
Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, time format, set the date, date format
–
Measurement units
–
Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption
–
Service
–
Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service
››› page 30
Factory settings
–
All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mirrors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, multi-function display
–
Driver assistance
Parking and manoeuvring
Vehicle lights
Mirrors/wind‐
screen wipers
Opening and closing
22
The essentials


›››
in CAR menu (Setup) on page 99
››› page 99
Driver information system
Introduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible
to read the different functions of the display
by scrolling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,
the multifunction display can only be operated with the steering wheel buttons.
The number of menus displayed on the instrument panel will vary according to the vehicle electronics and equipment.
A specialised workshop will be able to programme or modify additional functions, according to the vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it
will not be possible to read the menus. Some
warning messages can be confirmed and
made to disappear with the windscreen wiper
lever button or the multifunction steering
wheel button.
Operating the instrument panel menus
The information system also provides the following information and displays (depending
on the vehicle's equipment):
Driving data ››› page 26
■ Vehicle status
■ MFD from departure
■ MFD from refuelling
■ MFD total calculation
Assist systems ››› table on page 24
Reverse (optional)
■
Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system
Fig. 35 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-
tons.
Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation system
Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation system
Vehicle ››› table on page 24
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of injury.
● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
Fig. 36 Right side of multifunction steering
wheel: control buttons.
The driver information system is controlled
with the multifunction steering wheel buttons
››› Fig. 36 or with the windscreen wiper lever
››› Fig. 35 (if the vehicle is not equipped with
»
multifunction steering wheel).
23
The essentials
Enabling the main menu
Making changes according to the menu
● Switch the ignition on.
● With the rocker switch on the windscreen
● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears,
wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel, make the desired
changes. To increase or decrease the values
more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.
press button ››› Fig. 35 1 on the windscreen
wiper lever or button  on the multifunction
steering wheel ››› Fig. 36.
● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-
er: to display the main screen ››› page 24 or
to return to the main menu from another
menu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 35
2 .
● If managed from the multifunction steering
wheel: the main menu list is not displayed.
To go from point to point in the main menu,
press button   or   several times
››› Fig. 36.
Select a submenu
● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 35 2 on the
windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn
the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering
wheel ››› Fig. 36 until the desired option appears marked on the menu.
● Mark or confirm the selection with button
››› Fig. 35
on the windscreen wiper lever
or button  on the multifunction steering
wheel ››› Fig. 36.
Menu
Menu
Function
Driving
data
Information and possible configurations
of the multifunction display (MFD)
››› page 26, ››› page 99.
Assist
systems
Information and possible configurations
of the driver assistance systems
››› page 99.
Navigation
Information instructions from the activated navigation system: when a route guidance is activated, the turning arrows and
proximity bars are displayed. The appearance is similar to the Easy Connect system.
If route guidance is not activated, the direction of travel (compass) and the name
of the street along which you are driving
are shown ››› Booklet Navigation system.
● The selected option is displayed between
two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is
displayed on the right: 
● To consult the submenu option, press but-
ton ››› Fig. 35 1 on the windscreen wiper
lever or button  on the multifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 36.
24
1
Menu
Function
Audio
Station display on the radio.
Track name on the CD.
Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation system.
Telephone
Information and possible configurations
of the mobile phone preinstallation
››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation
system.
Lap timer*
In a racing circuit, measurement and
memorisation of lap times by the vehicle
and comparison with previously measured
best times ››› page 28.
Vehicle
status
Display of the current warning or information texts and other system components,
depending on the equipment
››› page 99.
Outside temperature display
When the outside temperature is below +4°C
(+39°F), the symbol “ice crystal” (warning of
risk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, this
symbol flashes and then it remains lit until
the outside temperature rises above +6°C
(+43°F) ››› in Indications on the display on
page 96.
When the vehicle is at a standstill or when
travelling at very low speeds, the temperature displayed may be higher than the true
The essentials
outside temperature as a result of the heat
produced by the engine.
The temperatures measured range from
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).
Gear-change indicator
●  Change to a higher gear: the suggested
gear appears to the right of the current gear
when a higher gear is recommended.
Bonnet, rear lid and doors open
●  Change to a lower gear: the suggested
gear appears to the left of the current gear
when a lower gear is recommended.
The gear recommendation may occasionally
skip a gear (2nd  4th).
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox*
The display is only visible in tiptronic mode
›››  page 159.
The following display symbols mean:
●  Shifting up a gear
●  Shifting down a gear
Fig. 37 Instrument panel: gear-change indicator (manual gearbox).
A gear change will be recommended if the
gear you are in is not the most economical
choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it
means that you are already in the most economical gear.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The following display symbols ››› Fig. 37
mean:
CAUTION
The gear-change indicator is intended to help
save fuel, but it is not intended to recommend the right gear for all driving situations.
In certain situations, only the driver can
choose the correct gear (for instance when
overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or
towing a trailer).
Note
The display disappears from the instrument
panel when you press the clutch pedal.
Fig. 38 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C:
front left door open; D: rear right door open
(5-door vehicles only).
When the ignition is switched on or when
driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are
open will be indicated on the instrument panel display, and, as applicable, this will be indicated audibly. The display may vary accord»
ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.
25
The essentials
Illustration
Key to ››› Fig. 38
A
 Do not continue driving!
The bonnet is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 202.
B
 Do not continue driving!
The rear lid is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 10.
C, D
 Do not continue driving!
A vehicle door is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 107.
Warning and information messages
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the ignition is
switched on and while the vehicle is moving.
Faults in the operation are displayed on the
screen using red and yellow symbols and
messages on the instrument panel display
(››› page 32, ››› page 32) and, in some cases, with audible warnings. The display may
vary according to the type of instrument panel fitted.
Priority 1 warning (red symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
warnings.
 Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warning
and control lamps on page 98!
Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessary, request assistance from specialised personnel.
26
Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
warnings.
A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct
levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in Warning and control lamps on page 99
Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, request assistance from specialised personnel.
Driving data
Memory
The MFD (multifunction display) shows different values for the journey and the consumption.
Informative text
Changing between display modes on the
MFD
Information relating to different vehicle processes.
● In vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel: Press the rocker switch  on the
windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 35.
Submenu Assist systems
● Vehicles with a multifunction steering
Assist
systems
Multifunction display memory
Function
menu
Front Assist
Fatigue
detection*
Switching the monitoring system on
and off ››› page 176.
Switching the fatigue detection on or
off (pause recommendation)
››› page 182.
wheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 36.
The multifunction display is equipped with
three memories that work automatically: MFD
from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD
total calculation. On the screen display, you
can read which memory is currently displayed.
● Toggle between memories with the ignition
on and the memory displayed: Press the
 button on the windscreen wiper lever
or the  button of the multifunction steering
wheel.
The essentials
Menu
Function
MFD from
departure
Display and storage of the values for
the journey and the consumption from
when the ignition is switched on to
when it is switched off.
If the journey is continued in less than
2 hours after the ignition is switched
off, the new data is added to the data
already stored in the memory. The
memory will automatically be deleted if
the journey is interrupted for more than
2 hours.
MFD from
refuelling
Display and storage of the values for
the journey and the consumption. By
refuelling, the memory will be erased
automatically.
MFD total
calculation
The memory records the values for a
specific number of partial trips, up to a
total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99
hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or
9999 km, depending on the model of
instrument panel. On reaching either of
these limitsa), the memory is automatically erased and starts to count from 0
again.
a)
Personalising the displays
In the Easy Connect system you can adjust
which of the possible displays of the MFD can
be shown on the instrument panel display
with the button  and the function button
Setup ›››  page 99.
Data summary
Menu
Function
Current fuel
consumption
The current fuel consumption display operates throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the
engine running and the vehicle
stopped, in litres/hour.
Average fuel
consumption
After turning on the ignition, average fuel consumption in litres/100 km will be displayed after
travelling about 100 metres. Otherwise horizontal lines are displayed.
The value shown is updated approximately every 5 seconds.
ACT®*: Depending on the equipment, number of active cylinders.
It varies according to the instrument panel version.
Erasing a memory manually
● Select the memory that you wish to erase.
● Hold the  button of the multifunction
steering wheel or the  button of the multifunction wheel pressed down for about 2 seconds.
Operating
range
Approximate distance in km that can
still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming the
same style of driving is maintained.
This is calculated using the current
fuel consumption.
Menu
Function
Travelling
time
This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ignition was
switched on.
Distance
covered
Distance covered in km (m) after
switching on the ignition.
Average
speed
The average speed will be shown after a distance of about 100 metres
has been travelled. Otherwise horizontal lines are displayed. The value
shown is updated approximately every 5 seconds.
Digital display of
speed
Current speed displayed in digital
format.
Speed warning at --km/h or Speed
warning at
--- mph
If the stored speed is exceeded (between 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 155 mph), an audible warning is
given together with a visual warning.
Oil temperature
Updated engine oil temperature digital display
Coolant temperature
gauge
Digital display of the current temperature of the liquid coolant.
Storing a speed with the speed warning
● Select the display Speed warning at
--- km/h (--- mph)
»
27
The essentials
● Press the button  on the windscreen
wiper lever or the button  on the multifunction steering wheel to store the current speed
and activate the warning.
● To switch system on: adjust to the desired
speed within 5 seconds using the rocker
switch  on the windscreen wiper lever or
by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel. Next, press the button
 or  again or wait several seconds.
The speed is stored and the warning activated.
● To switch system off: press the but-
ton  or
leted.

. The stored speed is de-
Engine oil temperature display
Vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel
● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 35 2 until
the main menu appears. Enter into Driving
data. With the button 2 move to the oil
temperature gauge.
temperature is between 80°C (180°F) and
120°C (250°F). If the engine is required to
work hard and the outside temperature is
high, the engine oil temperature can increase. This does not present any problem as
long as the warning lamps  ››› table on
page 33 or  ››› table on page 33 do not
appear on the display.
turn the thumbwheel until the oil temperature display appears.
The engine reaches its operating temperature
when in normal driving conditions, the oil
28
If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately
after it appears, press any button on the
windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steering wheel*.
Note
● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-
Additional electrical appliances
● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*:
Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 35 2 until the
main menu appears. Enter into the section
Driving data. With the rocker switch,
move to the display Convenience consumers.
● Operation with the multi-function steering
wheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 to
Driving data and enter with OK. Turn the
thumbwheel to the right until the Convenience consumers display appears.
In addition, a scale will inform you of the current sum of all the additional appliances.
ter you switch the ignition on again.
● The saving tips do not appear in all situations, but rather with a large separation of
time.
Timer*
You can access the timer via the selection
menu ››› page 24.
It allows you to manually time lap times on a
racing circuit, memorise them and compare
them to the vehicle's previous best times.
The following menus can be displayed:
● Stop
● Lap
Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
● Enter the submenu Driving data and
ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will
disappear automatically.
Saving tips
Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in
conditions that increase fuel consumption.
Follow them to reduce consumption. The indications appear automatically only with the ef-
● Pause
● Partial time
● Statistics
The essentials
Change from one menu to another
Menu “Pause”
● Vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel: press the rocker switch
windscreen wiper lever.

in the
● Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:
press

or

.
Menu “Stop”
Start
Since
start
Statistics
Continue
The interrupted timer continues.
New lap
A new timer starts. The halted lap ends
and is included in the statistics.
Interr.
lap
The timer of the current lap ends and is
cancelled. It is not included in the statistics.
End
The current timer ends. The lap is included in the statistics.
The timer starts.
If there are existing laps and they are included in the statistics, it will begin with
the number of laps in question.
It is only possible to begin with a new first
lap if the statistics have been reset first in
the Statistics menu.
Menu “Partial time”
Partial
time
For about 5 seconds a partial time is displayed. The timer continues in parallel.
The timer begins when the vehicle sets
off.
If the vehicle is already moving, the timer
begins once the vehicle has stopped.
New lap
The timer of the current lap stops and a
new lap starts immediately. The time for
the lap you have just completed is included in the statistics.
The Statistics menu is displayed on
the screen.
Menu “Lap”
New lap
The timer of the current lap stops and a
new lap starts immediately. The time for
the lap you have just completed is included in the statistics.
Partial
time
For about 5 seconds a partial time is displayed. The timer continues in parallel.
Stop
The current lap timer will be interrupted.
The lap does not end. The Pause menu is
displayed.
Stop
The current lap timer will be interrupted.
The lap does not end. The Pause menu is
displayed.
Menu “Long-term statistics”
View of the latest lap times:
– total time
– best lap time
– worst lap time
– average lap duration
A maximum of 10 laps is possible, and a
total duration of 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds.
If one of the 2 limits is reached, you will
have to reset the statistics in order to begin a new timer.
Back
This returns to the previous menu.
Resetting to
zero
All the memorised statistical data are reset.
WARNING
Do your best to avoid handling the timer
while driving.
● Only set the timer or consult statistics
when the vehicle is stationary.
● While driving, do not handle the timer in
complicated driving situations.
Speed warning device
The speed warning device warns the driver
when they have exceeded the pre-set speed
limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning
signal sounds, and the warning lamp  and
»
29
The essentials
the driver message Speed limit exceeded! will be displayed simultaneously on the
instrument panel. The warning lamp 
switches off when reducing speed below the
stored maximum limit.
Speed warning programming is recommended if you wish to be reminded of a maximum speed, such as when travelling in a
country with different speed limits or for a
maximum speed for winter tyres.
Setting speed limit warning
You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to
set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.
● Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP
> control button  Driver Assistant >
Speed warning.
● Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but-
ton Systems or else Vehicle systems >
Driver assistant > Speed warning.
The warning limit can be set from 30 to
240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment
is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.
Note
● Please bear in mind that, even with the
speed warning function, it is still important
to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the
speedometer and to observe the legal speed
limits.
30
until 500 km after the last service. Prior to
this, only lines are visible on the display.
● The speed limit warning function in the version for some countries warns you at a speed
of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set
speed limit.
Inspection reminder
Service intervals
When the Service date is approaching, when
the ignition is switched on a Service reminder is displayed.
The service interval indication appears on the
instrument panel display ›››  Fig. 110 3 .
SEAT distinguishes between services with engine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
services without engine oil change (e.g. Inspection).
In vehicles with Services established by time
or mileage, the service intervals are already
pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the intervals are determined individually. Thanks to
technological progress, maintenance work
has been greatly reduced. Because of the
technology used by SEAT, with this service
you only need to change the oil when the vehicle so requires. To calculate this change
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of
use and individual driving styles are considered. The advance warning first appears 20
days before the date established for the corresponding service. The kilometres (miles)
remaining until the next service are always
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)
and the time is given in complete days. The
current service message cannot be viewed
Vehicles without text messages: a spanner  will be displayed on the instrument
panel plus an indication in km.
The kilometres indicated are the maximum
number of kilometres that can be travelled
until the next service. After a few seconds,
the display mode changes. A clock symbol
appears and the number of days until the
next service is due.
Vehicles with text messages: Service in
--- km or --- days will be shown on the
instrument panel display.
Service due
When the service date is due, an audible
warning is given when the ignition is switched on and the spanner displayed on the
screen flashes for a few seconds.
Vehicles with text messages: Service now
will be shown on the instrument panel display.
The essentials
Reading a service notification
With the ignition switched on, the engine off
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
service notification can be read:
Press and hold the button 4 for more than 5
seconds to consult the service message.
When the service date has passed, a minus
sign is displayed in front of the number of kilometres or days.
Vehicles with text messages: Service
since --- km or --- days ago.will be
shown on the display.
The time can also be set via the  key and
Setup function button in the Easy Connect
system ›››  page 99.
OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper
lever, or OK on the multifunction steering
wheel.
● In vehicles with the LongLife system in
which the battery has been disconnected for
a long period of time, it is not possible to calculate the date of the next service. Therefore
the service interval display may not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the maximum
service intervals permitted in the ››› Booklet Maintenance Programme.
● Switching on the CCS: Move switch
››› Fig. 39
1 to . The system is on. If no
speed has been programmed, the system will
not control it.
● Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 39
2 in the  area. The current speed is
memorised and controlled.
● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move
switch ››› Fig. 39 1 to  or push the
brake. The cruise control system is switched
off temporarily.
● Reactivating the CCS: Press button
Cruise control
Operating the cruise control system
(CCS)*
››› Fig. 39
2 in . The memorised speed
is saved and controlled again.
● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button 2 in . The vehicle accelerates until the new stored speed.
Resetting service interval display
● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as follows:
tion: press button 2 in  to lower the
speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced
until reaching the new stored speed.
● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-
››› Fig. 39
ton ›››  Fig. 110
4
● Switching off the CCS: Move switch
1 to . The system is disconnected and the memorised speed is deleted.
.
● Switch ignition back on.
›››  Fig. 110 button and
press it again for the next 20 seconds.
● Release THE 4
Note
Fig. 39 On the left of the steering column:
switches and controls for operating the CCS


›››
in Introduction on page 174
››› page 174
● The service message disappears after a few
seconds, when the engine is started or when
31
The essentials
Warning lamps
On the instrument panel
Fig. 40 Instrument panel, on dash panel
Red warning lamps
–

Parking brake on.
››› page

 Do not continue driving!
The brake fluid level is too low or
there is a fault in the brake system.
››› page

32
Lit up or flashing:
 Do not continue driving!
Fault in the steering.
››› page

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.
››› page

Use the foot brake!

Central warning lamp: additional
information on the instrument panel display
154
153
150
61
Yellow warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additional
information on the instrument panel display
–
The essentials


it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or disconnection caused by the system.
flashes: ESC or ASR activated.


ASR manually deactivated.

Rear fog light switched on.

lights up or flashes: fault in the
emission control system.

Left or right turn signal.
››› page
flashes: fault in the diesel engine
management.

154
ABS faulty or does not work.
it lights up: pre-heating of diesel
engine.
On the instrument panel display
Other warning lamps
Front brake pads worn.
››› page
18
Hazard warning lights on.

Trailer turn signals

it lights up: Press the foot brake!
flashes: the selector lever locking
button has not engaged.
››› page
164

››› page
flashes: the speed set by the
speed limiter has been exceeded.
165

fault in the petrol engine management.
››› page

lights up or flashes: fault in the
steering system.
››› page

Tyre pressure too low, or fault in
the tyre pressure monitoring system.
››› page

Fuel tank almost empty.

Fault in airbag system and seat
belt tensioners.
it lights up: cruise control activated
or speed limiter switched on and
active.

Main beam on or flasher on.
››› page
19
››› page
121
››› page
184
››› page
157
››› page
31
››› page
19
Fig. 41 On the instrument panel display: door
open.
165
150

219
››› page

98
Ignition:  Do not carry on driving! Engine coolant level too low,
coolant temperature too high
Flashing: Fault in the engine
coolant system.
››› page
66
 Do not continue driving!
With the corresponding indication: door(s), rear lid or bonnet
open or not properly closed.

 Do not continue driving!
Engine oil pressure too low.
››› page
25
››› page
208
››› page
205
»
33
The essentials


Fault in the battery.
››› page
Fault in the cornering light system.
››› page
Diesel particulate filter blocked

Level of windscreen washer fluid
too low.
Flashing: Fault in the oil level detection. Control manually.
Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.
34
212
Driving light totally or partially
faulty.


››› page

Fault in the gearbox.

Immobiliser active.

Service interval display

Mobile telephone is connected
via Bluetooth to the original telephone device.

Mobile telephone battery charge
meter. Available only for devices
pre-installed in factory.

Freezing warning. The outside
temperature is lower than +4°C
(+39°F).
83



Start-Stop system activated.
Start-Stop system unavailable.
Low consumption driving status
››› page
181
Gearbox lever
Manual gearbox
››› page
24
116
››› page
164
On the instrument panel
››› page
210


Front passenger front airbag is
disabled (  
 ).
››› page
66
››› page
205
››› page
160
››› page
150
››› page
30
››› Book-
let Radio
or
››› Booklet Navigation
system
››› page
24


›››
in Warning and control lamps on
page 98
››› page 98
Fig. 42 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed
manual gearbox
The position of the gears is indicated on the
gearbox lever ››› Fig. 42.
● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
● Release the clutch.
Selecting reverse gear
● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
upwards, move it to the left as far as it will go
and then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 42
R .
The essentials
● Release the clutch.


›››
in Changing gears on page 157
››› page 156
Automatic gearbox*
N
Neutral (idling)
D
Drive (forward)
S
Sport programme: drive (forward)
+/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards
(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to
go down a gear.



›››
in Basic information on page 157
››› page 157
››› page 35
If there is a fault in the power system to the
electronic selector lever lock system (flat battery, blown fuse) or the system itself is faulty,
the selector lever cannot be moved from position P in the normal manner, which prevents the vehicle from being moved. The selector lever must be unlocked using the manual release.
● Apply the handbrake.
● Pull gently on both sides at the front of the
selector lever cover.
● Also loosen the cover at the rear.
● Press the yellow plastic part with your fin-
ger in the direction indicated by the arrow
››› Fig. 44.
Manual release of selector lever
Fig. 43 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po-
● Press the interlock button on the selector
lever knob at the same time and move the selector lever to position N (if the selector lever
is moved back to position P, it will lock
again).
sitions.
P
Parking lock
R
Reverse gear
Fig. 44 Manual release of the selector lever.
35
The essentials
Air conditioning
How does Climatronic* work?
Fig. 45 In the centre console: Climatronic con-
trols
Buttons/controls
1
Interior temperature setting
Display
36
8
Cooling on/off
16
Air distribution to footwells
9
Selected blower speed
17
Air recirculation
18
Cooling on/off
Buttons/controls
2
Selected interior temperature
10
Set blower speed
3
Degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit
11
Interior temperature sensor
4
Automatic air conditioning mode
12
Defrost or demist windscreen
5
Defrost or demist windscreen
13
Automatic mode
6
Air flow direction
14
Air distribution to windows
7
Air recirculation
15
Air distribution to upper body


›››
in General notes on page 142
››› page 147
The essentials
How does the manual air conditioning* work?
A
Temperature
B
Blower
C
Air distribution
A/C: Switching the cooling system on
2
 – Air distribution towards the windscreen in order to demist or defrost.
 – Air distribution to upper body.
 – Air distribution to footwell
 – Air distribution to the windscreen
and the footwell.
Fig. 46 In the centre console: Manual air con-
ditioning controls
1
Air recirculation
Control position
Button
Basic positions
Windscreen and side window defrost or demist
Mild heating
Cool as quickly as possible
Optimum cooling
Fresh air mode - blower
Air vents 4
A
B
C
1
2
Full right
3 or 4

Switched off
Switched on automaticallya)
Open and direct towards the
side window
Required temperature
2 or 3
/ 
Do not switch on
Do not switch on
Opening
Anti-clockwise as far
as it will go
Briefly 4, then 2
or 3

It is switched on automaticallyb)
Switched on
Opening
Required temperature
1 or 2

Do not switch on
Switched on
Open and direct towards the
roof
Anti-clockwise as far
as it will go
Required position

Do not switch on
Switched off
Opening
The lamp in button 2 lights up, even if not all of the conditions for cooling system operations are met. Cooling is indicated as available once all of the conditions are met ›››  page 145, General
notes.
a)
b)
In certain conditions, air recirculation mode can switch on automatically ›››  page 146, a lamp illuminates in the

button.
»
37
The essentials


›››
in General notes on page 142
››› page 145
How does the heating and the fresh air system work?
A
Temperature
B
Blower
C
Air distribution
 – Air distribution towards the windscreen in order to demist or defrost.
 – Air distribution to upper body.
 – Air distribution to footwell
 – Air distribution to the windscreen
and the footwell.
Fig. 47 In the centre console: heating system
and fresh air controls.
1
Air recirculation
Control position
Basic positions
Windscreen and side window defrost or demist
Mild heating
Fresh air mode - blower
38
Button
1
Air vents 4
A
B
C
Full right
3 or 4

Switched off
Open and direct towards the
side window
Required temperature
2 or 3
/ 
Do not switch on
Opening
Anti-clockwise as far as it
will go
Required position

Do not switch on
Opening
The essentials


›››
in General notes on page 142
Fuel
● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
● Rest it on the upper part of the fuel tank
flap ››› Fig. 48 B.
››› page 144
Closing the fuel tank cap
● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
Fluid Level control
● Close the lid.
Filling capacities


Capacities
Fuel tank
55 litres, of which 7 litres act
as reserve.
Windscreen washer fluid container in version
without headlight washer
3.5 litres
Windscreen washer fluid container in versions
with headlight washer
5.4 litres
›››
in Refuelling on page 200
››› page 199
Fig. 48 Vehicle as seen from the rear right:
fuel tank flap/fuel tank flap with tank unscrewed cap attached.
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
and locked automatically using the central
locking.
Opening the fuel tank cap
● Press the fuel tank flap in the direction of
the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 48 A and open it in the
direction of the arrow 2 .
39
The essentials
Oil
● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level
in that zone.
● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B .
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
Topping up engine oil
● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening
››› Fig. 50.

››› page 205
● Add oil slowly.
● At the same time, check the level to ensure
you do not add too much.
Fig. 49 Engine oil dipstick.
Coolant
● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,
unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.
Oil properties
Fig. 50 In the engine compartment: Engine
oil filler cap
The level is measured using the dipstick located in the engine compartment
›››  page 205.
The oil should leave a mark between zones
A and C . It should never exceed zone A .
40
● Zone A : Do not add oil.
Engine type
Specification
Petrol without flexible service interval
VW 502 00/VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible service
interval (LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without Particulate filter (DPF)
VW 505 01/VW 506
01/VW 507 00
Diesel. Particulate Filter Engines (DPF).
With or without flexible
service interval (with and
without LongLife)a)
VW 507 00
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the
engine.
Fig. 51 Engine compartment: coolant expansion tank cap.
The coolant tank is located in the engine
compartment ›››  page 205.
When the engine is cold, replace the coolant
when the level is below .
Coolant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the factory with a specially treated mixture of
The essentials
water and at least 40 % of the additive G13
(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the
necessary frost protection down to -25°C
(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of
the engine cooling system against corrosion.
It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boiling point of the coolant.
Brake fluid
Windscreen washer
Fig. 52 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-
Fig. 53 In the engine compartment: windscreen washer reservoir top.
To protect the cooling system, the percentage
of additive must always be at least 40 %,
even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is not required.
If for weather reasons further protection is
necessary, the proportion of additive may be
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise antifreeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive
(both are purple) to obtain optimal anti-corrosion protection. The mixture of G13 with G12
plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (greenblue) engine coolants will significantly reduce anti-corrosion protection and should
therefore be avoided.


›››
in Topping up the coolant level on
page 209
››› page 208
ervoir cap
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 205.
The windscreen washer reservoir is located in
the engine compartment ›››  page 205.
The level should be between the  and 
marks. If it is below , please visit a Technical Service.
To top up, mix water with a product recommended by SEAT.


›››
in Checking brake fluid level on
page 210
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.

››› page 210
››› page 209
Battery
The battery is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 205. It does not require
maintenance. It is checked as part of the Inspection Service.
»
41
The essentials


42
›››
in Introduction on page 211
››› page 211
The essentials
Emergencies
Underneath the instrument panel
Fuses
cated by the arrow and remove it ››› Fig. 54.
Fuse location
● Carefully tilt the cover in the direction indi● After changing the fuse, replace the cover
on the dash panel in the direction opposite
that is indicated by the arrow so that the cover tabs fit into the slots on the dash panel.
Subsequently, press down on the cover to
close.


›››
in Introduction on page 80
››› page 80
Replacing a blown fuse
In the engine compartment
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box
cover ››› Fig. 55.
Fig. 54 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse
box cover
Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: fuse box
cover
Identifying fuses situated below the dash
panel by colours
Colour
Amp rating
Black
1
Purple
3
Preparation
Light brown
5
● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-
Brown
7.5
Red
10
Blue
15
Yellow
20
White or transparent
25
››› Fig. 56.
Green
30
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown. »
Orange
40
Fig. 56 Image of a blown fuse
trical equipment.
● Open the corresponding fuse box
›››  page 81.
Identifying a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
43
The essentials
To replace a fuse
Type
Fog/cornering lights*
H8
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size.
Rear bulb light
Type
● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever
to position P.
● Replace the cover again or close the fuse
Brake light/tail light
P21/5W
● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
Side lights
P21/5W (side panel)
R5W (rear lid)
your vehicle.
Turn signal
PY21W
● Replace the blown fuse by one with an
box lid.
Bulbs
Bulbs (12 V)
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lifetime of the car and cannot be replaced. If
the headlight becomes damaged, go to a
specialised workshop.
Below, the light source used for all functions
is broken down.
Halogen headlights
Type
Daytime running light/side
light
P21W SLL
Dipped beam headlights
H7 LL
Main beam headlights
H7 LL
Turn signal
PY21W
Full-LED main headlights
Type
No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs
44
● Apply the handbrake.
Front fog light
● Remove the fuse.
Retro fog light
P21W
Reverse lights
P21W
LED rear lights
Type
Turn signal
PY21W
Retro fog light
P21W
● Switch on the hazard warning lights.
● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.
● Have the vehicle tool kit* ›››  page 75
and the spare wheel ›››  page 218 ready.
● Observe the applicable legislation for each
country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
etc.).
● All occupants should leave the vehicle and
Reverse lights
P21W
The remaining functions work with LEDs
Action in the event of a puncture
What to do first
● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface
and in a safe place as far away from traffic as
possible.
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
roadside crash barrier).
WARNING
● Always observe the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
● If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car with
a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
The essentials
Repairing a tyre with the anti-puncture kit
● Remove the lid from the filling tube
››› Fig. 57
and screw the open end of the
tube into the tyre valve.
3
● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,
fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant
bottle.
● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
1
.
››› Fig. 57
5
into the tyre valve.
● Check that the air bleed screw is closed
Fig. 57 Standard representation: contents of
››› Fig. 57
the anti-puncture kit.
● Start the engine and leave it running.
7
.
● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 57 9 into the
vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 134.
● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF
Sealing the tyre
switch ››› Fig. 57
● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
● Keep the air compressor running until it
● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
10 .
● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 57 3 into
the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break
automatically.
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube
››› Fig. 57
● If the indicated pressure still cannot be
● Remove the bottle from the valve.
Inflating the tyre
the ››› Fig. 57 1 tool to remove the insert.
Place it on a clean surface.
● Repeat the inflation process.
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
and request assistance from an authorised
technician.
ing the tool ››› Fig. 57
The anti-puncture kit is located under the
floor panel in the luggage compartment.
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
8
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››  page 78.


›››
in TMS Anti-puncture kit (Tyre Mobility System)* on page 77
››› page 76
.
reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). a maximum of 8
minutes.
● Disconnect the air compressor.
● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.
45
The essentials
Changing a wheel
Vehicle tool kit*
8
Spare set of bulbs
Before stowing the jack again, screw down
the arm as far as it will go.


›››
in What to do first on page 44
››› page 75
Wheel cover
Fitting
● Press the wheel trim onto the wheel at the
cut out designed for the valve.
● Press the wheel trim on both sides in the
direction of the valve so that it fits correctly
in place around all the perimeter.
CAUTION
● Press down by hand, do not hit the wheel
trim! Knocking it sharply, particularly at
points where the wheel trim has not yet been
inserted, could result in damage to the wheel
trim guiding and centring elements.
● Before fitting the trim on a steel wheel at-
tached with an anti-theft wheel bolt, make
sure the bolt is in the hole in the valve area
››› page 47, Anti-theft wheel bolts*.
Fig. 58 Vehicle tool kit.
The vehicle tool kit and the jack are stored in
a box on the spare wheel or in the spare
wheel well. There is also enough space for
the towing bracket ball coupling. The box is
strapped to the spare wheel with tape.
The vehicle tool kit includes the following
parts (depending on equipment):
46
● Where trim is fitted at a later date, ensure
enough air inflow is guaranteed in order to
cool the brake system.
Fig. 59 Remove the wheel cover.
1
Screwdriver
Removing
2
Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
● Place the hook from the vehicle tool kit* on
3
Towline anchorage
the reinforced edge of the wheel trim.
4
Wire hook for removing hub caps
● Insert the box spanner through the hook,
5
Jack
6
Box spanner for wheel bolts
7
Clip for wheel bolt cover
supporting it on the tyre and remove the
wheel trim.
The essentials
Wheel bolt caps
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
● Check the tightening torque as soon as
possible with a torque wrench.
Note down the code number stamped on the
front of the adapter or of the anti-theft wheel
bolt. You will need this number to obtain a
spare adapter from the SEAT original accessories programme.
You should always have a wheel bolt adapter
as part of your vehicle tools.
Fig. 60 Pull off the wheel bolt cap.
Removing
Fig. 61 Anti-theft wheel bolt with adapter.
● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the
Anti-theft wheel bolts (one bolt per wheel)
can only be loosened or tightened using a
factory-supplied adapter.
● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
● Pull off the hub cap or bolt cover.
cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 60.
Fitting
● Insert the caps as far as they will go over
the wheel bolts.
The wheel bolt caps are stored in a box on
the spare wheel or in the spare wheel well.
››› Fig. 61 with its
toothed side as far as it will go on the interior
toothing of the anti-theft wheel bolt A so
that only the outer hexagonal is protruding.
● Insert the adapter B
● Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over
adapter
B
.
● Loosen or firmly tighten the wheel bolt
››› page 47.
● After removing the adapter, replace the hub
cap or the anti-theft wheel bolt cover.
1) The corresponding adapter is required to unscrew
or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 47.
Loosening and tightening wheel bolts
Fig. 62 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheel
bolts.
Loosening wheel bolts
● Insert the box spanner onto the wheel bolt
as far as it will go 1).
»
47
The essentials
● Grip the end of the box spanner and turn
the wheel bolt about one turn anti-clockwise
››› Fig. 62.
Lifting the vehicle
Tightening wheel bolts
● Insert the box spanner onto the wheel bolt
as far as it will go 1).
● Grip the box spanner as close to the end as
possible and tighten the bolt firmly by turning clockwise.
WARNING
The wheel bolts should only be loosened
slightly (about one turn) before raising the
vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
Fig. 63 Changing a wheel: jack position
points.
Fig. 64 Fitting the jack.
To place the jack, locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel to be
changed ››› Fig. 63. The jacking point is underneath the stamp on the door sill.
● Raise the jack, turning the crank handle to
wind it up under the jacking point until its
claw is directly below the jacking point of the
door sill.
48
1) The corresponding adapter is required to unscrew
or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 47.
The essentials
● Adjust the jack so that its claw surrounds
the jacking point on the door sill ››› Fig. 64 - B
underneath the stamp.
● Make sure that the base of the jack is en-
tirely supported on a flat surface and that it is
vertical ››› Fig. 64 to the point where the claw
surrounds the jacking point on the door sill.
● Continue to wind up the jack using the
crank handle until the defective wheel is
clear off the ground.
Removing and fitting a wheel
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
Taking off the wheel
● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box
spanner and place them on a clean surface.
● Take off the wheel.
Putting on the spare wheel
When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation
direction, observe the instructions in
››› page 49.
● Mount the wheel.
● Screw on the wheel bolts in position and
tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs
using the wheel brace.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
Subsequent work
● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.
● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap
››› page 46.
● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
tion.
● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
Tyres with compulsory direction of rotation
A directional tread pattern can be identified
by the arrows on the sidewall that point in
the direction of rotation. Always observe the
direction of rotation indicated when fitting
the wheel to guarantee optimum properties
of this type of tyres with regard to grip,
noises, wear and aquaplaning.
If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare
tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive
with care as this means the tyre does not offer optimum driving properties. This is of particular importance when the road surface is
wet.
Replace the punctured tyre as soon as possible and restore the obligatory and correct direction of rotation of all tyres.
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the
luggage compartment ›››  page 137.
● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
ted tyre as soon as possible.
● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-
cator, adjust the pressure and store it in
memory ›››  page 219.
● Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Meanwhile, drive carefully.
● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
possible.
Snow chains
Use
Snow chains should only be used on the
front wheels.
»
● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
49
The essentials
In winter road conditions, snow chains not
only help to improve grip but also improve
the braking capacity.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used on tyres with the following wheel
rim/tyre combinations.
Rim size
Rim offset
Tyre size
5J x 14 a)
35 mm
175/70
6J x 15 b)
38 mm
185/60
6J x 15 b)
38 mm
195/55
Emergency towing of the vehicle
Towing
Fig. 66 Right side of the rear bumper: Towing
ring.
Towline anchorages
a)
Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greater
than 9 mm.
● Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-
rages.
b)
Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greater
than 13 mm.
It is located with the vehicle's tools
›››  page 75.
Remove the wheel trims before fitting snow
chains.
● Screw the front towline anchorage into the
screw connection ››› Fig. 65 and tighten it
with the wheel brace.
CAUTION
Chains must be removed when roads are free
of snow. Otherwise they will impair handling,
damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.
The rear towline anchorage is under the rear
bumper, on the right ››› Fig. 66.
Fig. 65 Right side of the front bumper: tow-
line anchorage screwed in.
Tow rope or tow bar
The tow bar offers increased safety and a
lower risk of damage.
The tow rope is recommended when there is
no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does
not damage the vehicle.
50
The essentials
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
● The tow rope must be taut before you drive
off.
● Release the clutch very carefully when start-
ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or accelerate gently (automatic gearbox).
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially
when using a tow rope. Both drivers should
realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. Inexperienced drivers should not attempt to
tow.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.
When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of overloading and damaging the
anchorage points.
The towline anchorages are located under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Switch on the ignition so that the turn signals, windscreen wipers and windscreen
washer can work. Ensure that the steering
wheel is unlocked and moves freely.
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles
with a manual gearbox. With an automatic
gearbox, place the lever in N.
To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The
brake servo does not work when the engine
is switched off.
The power steering only works when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is moving,
provided that the battery is sufficiently charged. Otherwise, it will need more force.
How to jump start
Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all
times.
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
cross section.

››› page 78
Tow-starting
If the engine will not start, first try starting it
using the battery of another vehicle
››› page 51. You should only attempt to towstart a vehicle if charging the battery does
not work. This is done by leveraging wheel
movement.
When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol engine, do not tow it more than a short distance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the
catalytic converter.
● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.
● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.
● Switch the ignition on.
● Once both vehicles are moving, release the
clutch.
● As soon as the engine has started, press
Jump leads
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine.
Both batteries need to have nominal voltage
of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the back-up battery should not be notably less than the
drained battery.
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
72553 (see cable manufacturer's instructions). The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least
35 mm2 for diesel engines.
Jump leads
Positive cable – usually red
Negative cable – usually black
WARNING
● A flat battery can also freeze at tempera-
tures slightly below to 0°C (32°F). Do not attempt to start the vehicle with a frozen battery. Risk of explosion!
»
the clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.
51
The essentials
● Please note the safety warnings referring to
working in the engine compartment
›››  page 202.
● The discharged battery must be properly
connected to the vehicle electrical system.
● The non-insulated parts of the battery
cialist vehicle battery shop.
clamps must not be allowed to touch. Additionally, the jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal
parts of the vehicle. Risk of short circuit!
How to jump start: description
● The jump leads should be checked in a spe-
● Do not connect the negative lead to the
negative terminal of the discharged battery.
In the event of sparks when starting the engine, the explosive gas given off by the battery could catch fire.
they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
burns!
Fig. 67 Diagram of connections for vehicles
without Start Stop system
etc.) away from the battery. - Risk of explosion!
● Never use the jump leads on batteries in
which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk of
explosion and acid burns.
3. Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal + in the vehicle providing assistance B .
nect one end of the black jump lead X to a
suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of
metal in the engine block, or to the engine
block itself ››› Fig. 68.
5. Connect the other end of the black jump
lead X to a solid metal component bolted
to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery.
Do not connect it to a point near the battery A .
6. Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
Note
● The vehicles must not touch each other, as
electricity could flow as soon as the positive
terminals are connected.
Fig. 68 Diagram of connections for vehicles
with Start Stop system
52
2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to
the positive + terminal of the vehicle
with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 67.
– For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-
● Do not bend over the battery. Risk of acid
● Keep sources of fire (flames, lit cigarettes,
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles
››› .
4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead to
the negative terminal – of the vehicle
providing the current B ››› Fig. 67.
● Position the jump leads in such a way that
● The screw plugs on the battery cells must
be screwed in firmly.
Jump lead terminal connections
The essentials
Starting
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat
battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until
the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch
off the dipped beam headlights if they are
switched on.
10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear
window in the vehicle with the flat battery.
This helps minimise voltage peaks which
are generated when the leads are disconnected.
11.When the engine is running, disconnect
the leads in reverse order to the details
given above.
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
metal-to-metal contact with the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after
about 1 minute.
WARNING
● Please note the safety warnings referring to
working in the engine compartment
›››  page 202.
● The battery providing assistance must have
the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and
approximately the same capacity (see imprint
on battery). Failure to comply could result in
an explosion.
● Never use jump leads when one of the bat-
teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could
leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery
freezes, it should be replaced.
● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes
away from batteries, danger of explosion.
Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
● Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
sult in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the
positive terminals are connected.
Changing the windscreen wiper
blades
Changing the wiper blades
● Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
● Do not connect the negative cable from the
other vehicle directly to the negative terminal
of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the
battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of
explosion.
● Do not attach the negative cable from the
other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to
the brake line.
● The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Fig. 69 Windscreen wiper blades.
Set the windscreen wiper arms to the service
position before changing the blades.
»
53
The essentials
Service position
● Close the bonnet.
Changing the rear window wiper
blade*
● Switch the ignition on and off.
● Press the lever to position 4
›››  Fig. 140 ›››  page 125, the windscreen wiper arms are set to the service position.
Taking off the wiper blade
● Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from
the glass moving the blade slightly in the direction of the arm – arrow A ››› Fig. 69.
● Hold the top of the windscreen wiper arm
with one hand.
● Unlock the catch 1 with the other hand
and remove the blade in the direction of arrow B .
Fitting the wiper blade
● Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi-
tion.
● Check that the wiper is correctly secured.
Fig. 70 Rear window wiper blade.
Taking off the wiper blade
● Lift the rear window wiper arm away from
the glass moving the blade slightly in the direction of the arm – arrow A ››› Fig. 70.
● Hold the top of the rear window wiper arm
with one hand.
● Unlock the catch 1 with the other hand
and remove the blade in the direction of arrow B .
● Fold the windscreen wiper arm back down
onto the glass.
Fitting the wiper blade
● Switch the ignition on and press the lever
● Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi-
to position 4 ›››  Fig. 140
›››  page 125, the windscreen wiper arms
are set to the basic position.
tion.
● Check that the wiper is correctly secured.
● Fold the rear window wiper arm back down
onto the glass.
54
– Check tyre pressure.
This chapter contains important information,
tips, suggestions and warnings that you
should read and consider for both your own
safety and for your passengers' safety.
WARNING
● This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, both
for the driver and the passengers. The other
sections of the on-board documentation also
contain further information that you should
be aware of for your own safety and for the
safety of your passengers.
● Ensure that the on-board documentation is
kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the
vehicle to another person.
good view of the surroundings.
– Make sure all luggage is secured
››› page 137.
– Make sure that no objects can interfere
with the pedals.
– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-
rors properly according to your size.
– Ensure that the passengers in the rear
seats always have the head restraints in
the in-use position ››› page 59.
– Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
straints according to their height.
– Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
››› page 72.
– Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position. ››› page 56.
Advice about driving
Before starting every trip
For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, always note the following points
before every trip:
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and your passengers. When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any circumstance, you endanger yourself as well as
others on the road ››› , for this reason:
– Always pay attention to traffic and do not
get distracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
– Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
– Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for road, traffic and weather conditions.
– When travelling long distances, take
breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip,
the risk of injury and accidents increases.
– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly. ››› page 61.
Safety equipment
Safety
Safety first!
– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
Factors influencing safety
Advice
Safe driving
signals are working properly.
Operation
– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
Emergencies
Safety
Technical data
Safe driving
Never put your safety or the safety of your
passengers in danger. In the event of an accident, the safety equipment may reduce the »
55
Safety
risk of injury. The following list includes most
of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
● Three-point seat belts
Correct position for passengers
Correct sitting position for driver
side seats,
● Belt tensioners for the front seats
– Move the driver's seat forwards or back-
● Belt height adjustment for the front seats
wards so that you are able to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the
floor with your knees still slightly angled
››› .
● Front airbags
● Side airbags in the front seat backrests
● Side airbags in the rear seat backrests*
– Ensure that you can reach the highest point
● Head-protection airbags
● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in
the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,
of the steering wheel.
Fig. 71 The proper distance between driver
and steering wheel
● Height-adjustable front head restraints
● Rear head restraints with in-use position
56
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 72.
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
● Adjustable steering column
Safety is everyone's business!
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
and non-use position
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your passengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
distance of at least 25 cm between the
steering wheel and the centre of your chest
››› Fig. 71.
● belt tension limiters for the front and rear
● Active front head restraints*
mend the following adjustments for the driver:
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61.
– Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
have the vehicle under control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat
Fig. 72 Correct head restraint position for the
driver.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
›››  page 11.
WARNING
● An incorrect sitting position of the driver
can lead to severe injuries.
Safe driving
● When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
This reduces the risk of injury when the driver
airbag is triggered.
● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such
cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this
could cause an accident.
● Move the lever up firmly so the steering
wheel position does not accidentally change
during driving. risk of accident!
● Make sure you are capable of reaching and
firmly holding the upper part of the steering
wheel: risk of accident!
● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it
points towards your face, the driver airbag
will not protect you properly in the event of
an accident. Make sure that the steering
wheel points towards your chest.
● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-
ieve optimal protection.
Technical data
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› page 59.
– Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the front passenger seat.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61.
It is possible to deactivate the front passenger airbag in exceptional circumstances
››› page 71.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
›››  page 11.
WARNING
● An incorrect sitting position of the front
passenger can lead to severe injuries.
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can
only provide optimal protection when the
backrest is in an upright position and the
driver is wearing his or her seat belt correctly.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
Advice
WARNING
● Never adjust the position of the steering
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
Operation
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 13.
– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
Emergencies
● If your physical constitution prevents you
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Correct sitting position for front passenger
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
– Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possible ›››
.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
there is at least 25 cm between your chest
and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer
than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect
you properly.
● If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Safety
● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at
least 25 cm distance between the centre of
the chest and the centre of the steering
wheel ››› Fig. 71. If you are sitting closer than
25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you
properly.
»
57
Safety
● Always keep your feet in the footwell when
the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the
dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An
incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden
braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due
to an incorrect sitting position.
● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-
senger in events such as sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the
backrest tilted far back! The airbag system
and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his
or her seat belt properly. The further the seat
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater
the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning
of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
– Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the rear seat.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61.
– Use an appropriate child restraint system
when you take children in the vehicle
››› page 72.
WARNING
● If the passengers in the rear seats are not
sitting properly, they could sustain severe injuries.
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
tion when seat backrests are in an upright
position and the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In
the rear seats are not sitting in an upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the seat belt increases.
– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
sitting position in the vehicle while travelling ››› .
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dangerous for all
vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,
but we would like to make you aware of this
issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
● Never stand in the vehicle.
● Never stand on the seats.
● Never kneel on the seats.
● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
● Never lean against the dash panel.
● Never lie on the rear bench.
● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
● Never sit sideways.
● Never lean out of a window.
Correct sitting position for rear seat
passengers
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,
passengers on the rear seat bench must consider the following:
– Sit up straight.
– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po58
sition ››› page 59.
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially reduce the protective function of seat
belts and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect seat belt position. As the driver, you
are responsible for all passengers, especially
children.
● Never put your feet out of a window.
● Never put your feet on the dash panel.
● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
well.
● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
gage compartment.
Safe driving
vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags
are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant
who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-
Adjusting the head restraints ››› page 128
er sitting position and maintain it throughout
the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip ››› page 56, Correct position for passengers.
Correct adjustment of front head restraints
edge is, as far as possible, at the same level as the top of your head, or at the very
least, at eye level ››› Fig. 73.
Technical data
● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the
Advice
risk of severe injuries.
Note
The active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant applies a high level of pressure to the seat backrest (e.g. by
“falling” back into the seat when entering the
vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front
seat head restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous,
as the active head restraints will return to the
original position immediately and are thus
once again ready.
Active head restraints*
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their
seats during a rear end collision. The resulting body pressure on the seat backrest activates the active head restraint* on the front
seat, which moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the same time. This movement reduces the distance between the occupant's
head and the head restraint, thus reducing
the risk of injuries such as whiplash.
Correct adjustment of rear head restraints
Operation
● Any incorrect sitting position increases the
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of passenger protection and can
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
situations.
Emergencies
WARNING
WARNING
● Travelling with the head restraints removed
Fig. 73 Correctly adjusted head restraint as
viewed from the front and the side.
● The head restraints must always be adjus-
ted according to the height of the passenger.
Fig. 74 Head restraints in the correct posi-
tion.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of passenger protection and can
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
situations.
Safety
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
severe injuries. An improper adjustment of
the head restraints may cause death in an accident and increase the risk of suffering injuries during abrupt braking actions or unexpected manoeuvres.
»
59
Safety
Rear outer seat head restraints
Pedal area
– The rear outer seat head restraints have 4
positions.
– Three positions for use ››› Fig. 74. In these
positions, the head restraints are used normally, and along with the rear seat belts,
protect passengers in the rear seats.
– And one position for non-use.
– To fit the head restraints in position for use,
pull on the edges with both hands in the
direction of the arrow.
Centre rear head restraint*
– The centre head restraint only has two posi-
tions, in-use (head restraint up) and nonuse (head restraint down).
WARNING
● Under no circumstances should the rear
passengers travel while the head restraints
are in the non-use position.
Pedals
– Ensure that you can always press the accel-
erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired
to the floor.
– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
paired to their initial positions.
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals ››› .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasteners* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must
be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop
the vehicle.
● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint
Wear suitable footwear
with either of the outer seat rear head restraints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
CAUTION
Note the instructions on the adjustment of
the head restraints ››› page 128.
WARNING
● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident
may occur. Risk of serious injuries.
60
● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.
● Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area and
impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, you will
not be able to operate the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
The protective function of seat belts
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front
and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped
with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved
only for four seats. Two front seats and two
rear seats.
WARNING
● Never transport more than the permitted
amount of people in your vehicle.
● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-
ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or
her seat. Children must be protected with an
appropriate child restraint system.
Seat belt lamp* 
The control lamp illuminates to remind the
driver to fasten his seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
1)
Depending on the model version
cording to the child's height and weight.
The control lamp on the instrument panel
lights up  1) if the driver or passenger1) has
not fastened their belt when the ignition is
switched on.
If, when starting to drive, speed surpasses
25 km/h (15 mph) approx. and no seat belts
are worn or they are unfastened during the
drive, a warning sound will be heard for a few
seconds. The warning light will also flash .
The  lamp goes out when the driver and
passenger seat belts are fastened with the ignition switched on.
Advice
Number of seats
seat belts properly before driving off.
– Protect children by using a child seat ac-
Fig. 75 Drivers with properly worn seat belts
will not be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the proper position. They also help prevent
uncontrolled movements that may result in
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an accident.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the
belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are designed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury. »
Operation
The whys and wherefores of
seat belts
Emergencies
– Fasten your seat belt securely.
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their
Safety
Seat belts
Technical data
Seat belts
61
Safety
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury
and improving the chances of survival when
involved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protection provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end collisions, rollovers or accidents in which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit
is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat
belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants
have fastened their seat belts properly before
you drive off!
– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened
at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
– Always wear the seat belt as described in
62
this section.
● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
blocked with paper or other objects, as this
can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or
even when driving in town. Other vehicle occupants must also wear the seat belts at all
times, otherwise they run the risk of being injured.
● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection
if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
● Never allow two passengers (even children)
to share the same seat belt.
● Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in
motion.
● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
● The seat belt must never be twisted while it
similar items to alter the position of the belt
webbing.
● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the
connections, belt retractors or parts of the
buckle could cause severe injuries in the
event of an accident. Therefore, you must
check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-
dent and stretched must be replaced by a
specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage.
The belt anchorage should also be checked.
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
is being worn.
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.
● The seat belt should never lie on hard or
● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
because this can cause injuries.
● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or
Safety instructions on using seat
belts
● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat
over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belts, reducing their capacity
to protect.
jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
retractors may not work properly
››› page 198.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
the vehicle and its passengers. The higher
the speed and the greater the weight, the
more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an
accident.
Fig. 77 The unbelted passenger in the rear
seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the
driver wearing a seat belt
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics
work in the case of a head-on collision: when
a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy
Because the vehicle occupants in our example are not restrained by seat belts, in the
event of crashing against a wall, all of the occupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed
solely by said impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Emergencies
thrown forward violently
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ››› Fig. 77.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Safety
Fig. 76 A driver not wearing a seat belt is
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h
(30 mph), for example, the corresponding kinetic energy is multiplied by four.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands.
In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel, dash panel,
windscreen or whatever else is in the way
››› Fig. 76.
Advice
called “kinetic energy” is created both in the
passengers and inside the vehicle.
Operation
Physical principles of a frontal collision
Technical data
Seat belts
63
Safety
How to properly adjust your
seatbelt
ing sudden braking, during travel in steep
areas or bends and during acceleration, the
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
Fastening and unfastening the seat
belt
The automatic belt retractors on the front
seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners
››› page 65.
Seat belt release
● Press the red button on the belt buckle
Fig. 79 Placing the seat belt in the shoulder
and pelvis area for pregnant women.
Fasten your seat belt
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and
lap.
● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
Fig. 78 Positioning and removing the seat
belt buckle.
appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click
››› Fig. 78 A.
● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur64
››› Fig. 78 B. The latch plate is released and
springs out ››› .
● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim is not damaged.
Positioning seat belts
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they are properly positioned.
The following features are available to adjust
the seat belt in the shoulder region:
● belt height adjustment for the front seats.
● front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
● The seat belts offer best protection only
when the backrests are in an upright position
and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of
another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 13.
● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-
vere injuries in the event of an accident.
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit
comfortably on the torso
the pelvis, never across the stomach. The
seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on
the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to
take up any slack.
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over the
pelvis, never across the stomach, and always
lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the
abdomen ››› Fig. 79.
● Always engage the retractor lock when you
are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1
››› page 72.
● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 62.
Fig. 80 Location of the belt height adjuster.
The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can
be used to adjust the proper belt position at
the shoulder.
– Press the upper part of the shoulder belt
guide and hold it in this position ››› Fig. 80.
– Move the shoulder belt guide up or down
until you have adjusted the seat belt
››› page 64.
– After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt
sharply to check that the catch on the
shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
The seat belts for the occupants in the front
seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sensors will trigger the belt tensioners only during severe head-on, lateral and rear-end collisions and only if the seat belt is worn. This
retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing
the forward motion of the occupants.
The belt tensioners will not be triggered in
the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle
overturns, or in accidents where no major
forces act on the vehicle.
Advice
cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the
risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Operation
How the seat belt tensioner works
● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
Seat belt tensioners
Note
● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is
not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
● The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components of
the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar with these regulations,
which are also available to you.
Emergencies
Belt height adjustment
Safety
not protect you properly and the risk of injury
is increased.
Technical data
Seat belts
65
Safety
Service and disposal of belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the
seat belts that are installed in the seats of
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence may
be that, in the event of an accident, the belt
tensioners function incorrectly or may not
function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to
the specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
● Improper use or repairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may
fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or
install parts of the belt tensioners or seat
belts.
● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-
matic retractor cannot be repaired.
● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other repair
66
work, must be performed by a specialised
workshop only.
● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be changed
if they have been activated.
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why is it so important to wear a seat
belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the seat belt must always be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat
belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for
your safety ››› page 61, The whys and wherefores of seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the airbag is triggered, you may sustain fatal injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
Airbag system
Whether or not the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side and/or
curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how
serious, is not a determining factor for the
airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-
ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to
critical or fatal injuries.
● All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.
Children up to 12 years old should always
● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating
Technical data
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
● does not light up when the ignition is
switched on ››› page 68,
Advice
lean forward or to the side while travelling or
assume an incorrect sitting position, there is
a substantially increased risk of injury. This
increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on
airbag, always wear the seat belt properly
››› page 61.
● turns off and then lights up again after the
● Always adjust the front seats properly.
● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
ignition is switched on
Operation
The most important factors that will trigger
an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle
of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will illuminate for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
moving.
Description of airbag system
The airbag system mainly comprises (as per
vehicle equipment):
● an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
● frontal airbags for driver and passenger,
● side airbags,
● curtain airbags,
● a control lamp  on the dash panel
The airbag system is not triggered if:
● the ignition is switched off
● there is a minor frontal collision
● there is a minor side collision
● there is a rear-end collision
● the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
● The seat belts and airbags can only provide
● key-operated switch for front passenger air-
maximum protection if the occupants are
seated correctly ››› page 56, Correct position
for passengers.
bag,
● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,
● a control lamp for disabling/enabling the
have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a
››› page 68.
front passenger airbag.
Emergencies
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maximum protection.
travel on the rear seat. Never transport children in the vehicle if they are not restrained
or the restraint system is not appropriate for
their age, size or weight.
Safety
airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may
inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This also applies to children.
»
67
Safety
frontal collision the system might not trigger
correctly or may fail to trigger at all.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousandths of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
Airbag and seat belt tensioner control
lamp 
If the deceleration rate is below the predefined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though
the accident may cause extensive damage to
the car.
The control lamp monitors all airbags and
seat belt tensioners in the vehicle, including
control units and wiring connections.
The following airbags are triggered in serious head-on collisions
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems
operation is constantly monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on,
the control lamp  illuminates for several
seconds (self-diagnosis) and the instrument
panel display* shows AIRBAG/TENSIONER.
● Driver airbag.
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
● Front passenger front airbag
In special accidents instances, several airbags may activate at the same time.
The following airbags are triggered in serious side-on collisions
In the event of minor head-on and side collisions, rear-end collisions, overturning or rollover of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
The system must be checked when the control lamp  :
dent.
● does not light up when the ignition is
● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-
switched on,
dent.
Activation factors
● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
is switched on
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be generalised. Some factors play an important role,
such as the properties of the object the vehicle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
cident.
● turns off and then lights up again after the
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag activation.
68
The control unit analyses the collision trajectory and activates the respective restraint
system.
In an accident with airbag activation:
● the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
● the hazard warning lights switch on;
● all doors are unlocked;
● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
ignition is switched on
● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning
lamp stays on continuously. In addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message
appears on the instrument panel display for
approximately 10 seconds and a short audible warning is given. In this event, you
Airbag system
If the front airbag, side airbag, head protection airbag or the belt tensioner are disabled
using the diagnostics system:
● After switching on the ignition, the  warning lamp illuminates for about 4 seconds and
flashes for another 12 seconds.
Airbag safety instructions
The informative display indicates:
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 14.
If the front passenger airbag has been disabled with the airbag switch located in the
storage compartment side:
● When the ignition is turned on, the 
warning lamp illuminates for about 4 seconds.
● The airbag is disabled, signalled with the
warning lamp   which lights up with the
word      placed in the centre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 81
››› page 71.
WARNING
● If there is a malfunction, the airbag and
belt tensioner system cannot properly perform its protective function.
Technical data
Side airbags*
WARNING
● The deployment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in any
case be occupied by other passenger, pets
and objects.
● The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have deployed.
WARNING
● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
forward, or are not seated correctly while the
vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk
of injury if the side airbag system is triggered
in an accident.
● In order for the side airbags to provide their
maximum protection, the prescribed sitting
position must always be maintained with
seat belts fastened while travelling.
● Occupants of the outer seats must never
● Do not attempt to modify components of
carry any objects or pets in the deployment
space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in
this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to
the doors. This would impair the protection
offered by the side airbags.
the airbag system in any way.
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only
● When driving, always hold the steering
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
● It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
wheel with both hands on the outside part at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never
hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock po-
Advice
Front airbags
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 15.
Operation
Airbag/belt tensioner disabled!
sition, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if
the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Emergencies
The airbag system availability is controlled
electronically, regardless of whether an airbag is disabled.
● If a malfunction occurs, have the system
checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident,
the airbag system and belt tensioners may
not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.
Safety
should have a specialised workshop check
the system immediately.
»
69
Safety
● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest
bolster because the system may be damaged.
In this case, the side airbags would not be
triggered.
● Under no circumstances should protective
covers be fitted over seats with side airbags
unless the covers have been approved for use
in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys
from the side of the backrest, the use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side
airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
● Any damage to the original seat upholstery
or around the seams of the side airbag units
must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop.
● The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have deployed.
● Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of
the front seat) should only be performed by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may
occur during the airbag system operation.
● Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
● The side and head airbags are managed
70
through sensors located in the interior of the
front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
the side and curtain (head) airbags neither
the doors nor the door panels should be
modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a
specialised workshop.
scribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
● In a side-on collision the side airbags will
● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must
not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of
the doors, due to air escaping through the
areas with holes or openings in the door panel.
be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a
screen dividing the interior of the vehicle.
See your technical service to make this adjustment.
● Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels
objects between the occupants of the rear
seats and the deployment space of the headprotection airbags so that the head-protection airbag can deploy without restriction and
provide the greatest possible protection.
Therefore, sun blinds which have not been
expressly approved for use in your vehicle
may not be attached to the side windows
have been removed.
● Never drive if the interior door panels have
been removed or if the panels have not been
correctly fitted.
● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers
in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have
been closed properly.
● Always check that the openings are closed
or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted inside the door panels.
● Any work carried out to the doors should be
made in an authorised specialised workshop.
Curtain airbags*
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 16.
WARNING
● In order for the head-protection airbags to
provide their maximum protection, the pre-
● There must be no other persons, animals or
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
● The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have deployed.
● Any work on the head-protection airbag
system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
● Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
Airbag system
The disabling of airbags is only carried out in
certain cases, i.e. if:
● a child seat is required in the front passen-
ger seat with the child facing in the opposite
direction to the direction of travel (in some
countries, due to divergent legal requirements, facing in the direction of travel)
››› page 74;
● despite the driver's seat being in the cor-
rect position, a minimum distance of 25 cm
cannot be maintained between the centre of
the steering wheel and the driver's torso,
● installation of special devices is required in
the steering wheel area due to a physical disability,
Airbag system control
Technical data
● At your authorised SEAT dealer you can find
information on which vehicle airbags can be
disabled.
Advice
We recommend that you contact an authorised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other airbags.
try regarding the disabling of airbags.
Front passenger front airbag switch
The airbag system availability is controlled
electronically, regardless of whether an airbag is disabled.
Operation
Deactivation of the front airbag
The front passenger front airbag can be disabled using the switch ››› page 71.
Note
● Follow the current legislation in your coun-
If an airbag was disabled using a diagnostics
system:
● the airbag system warning lamp  illuminates after switching on the ignition for
about 4 seconds, and then flashes for about
12 seconds.
Emergencies
Deactivating airbags
● if you have special seats installed (e.g. an
orthopaedic seat without side airbags).
If the airbag has been disabled with the airbag switch on the side of the dash panel:
● the airbag control lamp  will illuminate
for about 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
● the airbag is disabled, signalled with the
warning lamp   which lights up with the
word      placed in the centre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 81 3 .
Safety
● The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of the
front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
the side and curtain airbags neither the
doors nor the door panels should be modified
in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the
front door is damaged, the airbag system
may not work correctly. All work carried out
on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop.
Fig. 81 Front passenger front airbag
switch/warning lamp for disabling the front
passenger airbag.
»
71
Safety
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 14.
The switch disables only the front passenger
front airbag.
Switching on the airbag
– Switch the ignition off.
– Open the passenger side storage compart-
ment.
– Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
››› Fig. 81. About 3/4 of the key should enter, as far as it will go.
– Then turn the key gently to the  position.
Do not force it if you feel resistance, and
make sure you have inserted the key fully.
– Close the passenger side storage compart-
ment.
– Check, with the ignition switched on, that
the   control lamp does not illuminate,
with the words      in the
centre of the dash panel.
Control lamp with the word   
  (front passenger airbag disabled)
If the front passenger front airbag is disabled, after switching on the ignition, the control lamp will illuminate for several seconds,
then it will switch off for about 1 s and then
switch on again.
72
If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault
in the disabling of the airbag system ››› .
Please go immediately to an Official Service.
WARNING
● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
● Always switch off the ignition before disa-
bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do
so could result in a fault in the airbag disabling system.
● Never leave the key in the airbag disabling
switch as it could get damaged or enable or
disable the airbag during driving.
● If the   (airbag disabled) control lamp
flashes, the front passenger front airbag will
not trigger in the event of an accident! Have
the system immediately checked by an Official Service.
Transporting children safely
Safety for children
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident statistics, we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety reasons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
››› page 63. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone structures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must
always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Original Accessories Programme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries).
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
● An inflating front passenger airbag can
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 16.
strike the rear-facing child seat and project it
with great force against the door, the roof or
the backrest.
Read and always observe the safety information included in the following chapters:
● Never install a child seat facing backwards
● Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag ››› page 66, Why is it so important
to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?.
● Objects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag ›››
on page 69.
in Front airbags
The passenger side front airbag, when enabled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
on the front passenger seat unless the front
passenger front airbag has been disabled.
Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!
However, if it is necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger front airbag
must always be disabled ››› page 71. If the
front passenger seat has a height adjustment
option, move it to the highest position.
● For those vehicles that do not include a key
lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a technical service.
● All vehicle occupants, especially children,
must assume the proper sitting position and
be properly belted in while travelling.
● If children assume an improper sitting posi-
tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose
themselves to greater risk of injury in the
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
accident. This is particularly important if the
child is travelling on the front passenger seat
and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or
even death.
● A suitable child seat can protect your child!
● Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or inside the vehicle because depending on
the season, very high temperatures may be
reached inside a parked vehicle, which could
be fatal.
● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden
braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
Advice
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
Operation
Important information regarding the
front passenger's airbag
WARNING
● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-
● Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or to
stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.
In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other vehicle
occupants.
Emergencies
We recommend you always carry the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation.
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch ››› page 71.
When transporting children, use a child seat
suitable for the age and size of each child
››› page 72.
● Only one child may occupy a child seat
››› page 74, Child seats.
Safety
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats. Always read
and note ››› page 73.
Technical data
Transporting children safely
● Never hold children or babies on your lap,
this can result in potentially fatal injuries to
the child!
73
Safety
Child seats
Safety instructions
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 16.
WARNING
● When travelling, children must be secured
in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable
for age, weight and size.
● Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
››› page 73.
WARNING
● The retaining rings are designed only for
use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system
child seats.
● Never secure other child seats that do not
have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or
retaining belts or objects to the fastening
rings - this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child.
● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* securing rings.
Categorisation of child seats into
groups
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable for the child.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the
right child seat for your model and age group
at SEAT dealers.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECER 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commission for Europe Regulation.
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9
months)
Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18
months)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4
years old)
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7
years old)
Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7
years old)
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 standard bear the
test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats.
74
WARNING
Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
››› page 73.
Self-help
First-aid kit and warning triangle*
Fire extinguisher*
Read the instructions given on the fire extinguisher carefully.
The fire extinguisher must be checked once a
year by an authorised person (take the applicable legal regulations into account).
WARNING
Fig. 82 Location of the warning triangle.
The warning triangle, measuring max.
436 x 45 x 32 mm, can be secured to the lining on the rear of the luggage compartment
with rubber straps ››› Fig. 82.
WARNING
The first-aid kit and fire extinguisher must be
properly secured so that they are not catapulted through the vehicle during driving and
braking manoeuvres or in the event of an accident. Risk of injury.
The fire extinguisher must be properly secured so that it is not catapulted through the
vehicle, causing injuries, during driving and
braking manoeuvres or in the event of an accident.
Note
● The fire extinguisher must comply with local legal requirements.
● Observe the expiry date of the fire extinguisher. The fire extinguisher may not work
properly if used after the expiry date.
Technical data
WARNING
● The factory-supplied jack is only designed
for changing wheels on this model of vehicle.
On no account attempt to use it for lighting
heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury!
Advice
● We recommend you use the first-aid kit and
the warning triangle from the SEAT Original
Accessories programme available in authorised SEAT dealers.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 46
● Make sure that the vehicle tools are stored
properly in the luggage compartment.
Note
Operation
Emergency equipment
● Observe the expiry date of the contents of
the first aid kit.
Vehicle tool kit*
● Make sure the box always remains strap-
ped to the spare wheel with tape.
● The jack does not generally require any
maintenance. If required, it should be
greased using universal type grease.
Emergencies
Self-help
Note
Changing a wheel
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 46
Safety
Emergencies
WARNING
● If you have a puncture in moving traffic,
switch on the hazard warning lights and
place the warning triangle at the obligatory
»
75
Emergencies
distance. Observe applicable local legal regulations. This is for your own safety and that of
other drivers.
● If you have a flat tyre, stop the vehicle as
far away as possible from moving traffic. Stop
on flat, solid ground.
● If you have to change the tyre on a gradi-
ent, block the wheel opposite the wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent the vehicle from rolling away unexpectedly.
● If the vehicle has been fitted with tyres or
alloys that are different to those fitted in
manufacture, the instructions ››› page 217,
New tyres or wheels must be followed.
CAUTION
● The prescribed tightening torque for wheel
bolts on steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
● If the anti-theft wheel bolt is overly tight-
ened, this could damage the bolt and the
adapter.
Note
● The set of anti-theft wheel bolts or the
adapter are available from authorised SEAT
dealers.
● Please observe the relevant local legal reg-
ulations when changing the wheel.
closed.
and legs, underneath the vehicle when it is
supported only by the jack.
● Secure the base of the jack with suitable
supports so that it cannot slip. The jack could
slide if the ground below it is soft and slippery and the vehicle could slip off it. Therefore, place the jack on a firm surface or use a
large, stable base. On a slippery surface, e.g.
tile, use a non-slip base such as a rubber
mat.
● Never start the engine when the vehicle is
76
Wheel bolts
The wheel bolts are matched to the rims.
When installing different wheels, e.g. to fit
light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres,
it is important to use the correct wheel bolts
with the right length and correctly shaped
bolt heads. This is essential for a secure fit of
the wheels and for proper operation of the
brake system.
Note
jacked. Risk of injury.
● Never grease or oil the wheel bolts!
● The jack should only be used in the correct
● If the wheel bolt is very tight, it may be
possible to loosen it by pushing down the
end of the box spanner carefully with your
jacking points.
● If you notice that the wheel bolts are rusty
and difficult to turn when changing a wheel,
they must be replaced before having the
tightening torque checked.
Tyre repairs
TMS Anti-puncture kit (Tyre Mobility
System)*
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 45
● Always raise the vehicle with the doors
● Never place parts of your body, e.g. arms
foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and
take care not to slip.
The Tyre Mobility System is stored in a box
under the carpet in the boot.
Using the Tyre Mobility System you can reliably seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies,
provided that cuts or punctures are no larger
than approx. 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove the foreign bodies, e.g. bolts or nails,
from the tyre!
The tyre must be repaired immediately.
The repair made using the Tyre Mobility System under no circumstances replaces permanent tyre repair and should only be used to
drive to the nearest official service.
Self-help
● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-
● if the sidewall of the wheel has been dam-
aged,
● The sealant is a health hazard and must be
cleaned immediately if it comes into contact
with the skin.
● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the
● If you have been driving with very low tyre
reach of small children.
pressure or a completely flat tyre
● Never use an equivalent jack, even if it has
● If the best-before date on the air can has
been approved for your vehicle.
expired
● Always stop the engine, apply the hand-
WARNING
Using the tyre mobility system can be dangerous, especially when filling the tyre at the
roadside. Please observe the following rules
to minimise the risk of injury:
● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Park it at a safe distance from surrounding
traffic to fill the tyre.
● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat
and solid.
● All passengers and particularly children
must keep a safe distance from the work area.
● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users.
● Use the tyre mobility system only if you are
familiar with the necessary procedures. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.
● Take into account the separate instruction
manual of the tyre mobility set* manufacturer.
Components of the tyre mobility set*
brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a
manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of
vehicle involuntary movement.
Operation
● on slashes or punctures larger than 4 mm,
SEAT dealerships.
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same performance properties as a conventional tyre.
Emergencies
-20°C (-4°F),
bility set as soon as possible.
Technical data
● when the outside temperature is below
Note
● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at
Advice
● If the wheel rim has been damaged,
● The tyre mobility set is intended for temporary emergency use only until you can reach
the nearest specialised workshop.
● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
fast cornering.
● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observing
any legal requirements.
Fig. 83 Standard representation: contents of
the anti-puncture kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
the floor covering in the luggage compartment. It includes the following components
››› Fig. 83:
1
Tyre valve remover
2
Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.
80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Safety
The Tyre Mobility System kit shall not be
used:
»
77
Emergencies
3
Filler tube with cap
4
Air compressor
5
Tube for inflating tyres
6
Warning provided by tyre pressure monitoring system (it can also be integrated in
the compressor).
7
Air bleed screw (in its place, the compressor may have a button).
8
ON/OFF switch
9
12 volt connector
10
Bottle of sealant
11
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the
lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert
can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11 .
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compressor
and the inflator tube may become hot.
● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or
hot air compressor on flammable material.
● Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
78
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maximum of 8 operational minutes to avoid overheating! Before switching on the air compressor again, let it cool for several minutes.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious injury.
● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure
is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
● Seek specialist assistance.
Towing the vehicle
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 83 5 again
and check the pressure on the gauge 6 .
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:
● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed
sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
● You should obtain professional assistance
››› .
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:
● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
again.
● Carefully resume your journey until you
reach the nearest specialised workshop without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
● Have the damaged tyre replaced.
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 50.
Vehicles with manual gearbox can be towed
using a towbar or towrope. They can also be
towed with either the front or rear wheels lifted off the road.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox can be towed using a towbar or towrope. They can also
be towed with the front wheels lifted off the
road. If the vehicle is towed with the rear
wheels lifted off the road the automatic gearbox will be damaged!
Maximum towing speed is 50 km/h (31
mph).
Self-help
● If, due to a fault, there is no oil in the gear-
box, the car may only be towed with the driven wheels lifted clear of the road and transported on a special vehicle transporter or
trailer.
● If normal towing is not possible or if the vehicle is to be towed for further than 50 km,
the vehicle must be transported on a special
vehicle transporter or trailer.
Technical data
Front towline anchorage
● We recommend you use the towrope or towbar available in the SEAT Original Accessories
programme from authorised SEAT dealers.
● Towing a vehicle requires a certain degree
of practical skill. Both drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing.
Inexperienced drivers should not attempt to
tow away another vehicle or to have their vehicle towed.
Advice
● Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of engine
damage! In vehicles with a catalytic converter, fuel that has not been burned could reach
the catalytic converter and catch fire in it.
This could damage and destroy the catalytic
converter. You may use the battery from another vehicle to help you start your engine
›››  page 52.
Note
● Note the legal regulations concerning tow-
ing, particularly those regarding the signalling of the towed and towing vehicle.
● The towrope must not be twisted, as under
Operation
CAUTION
certain circumstances this could unscrew the
front towline anchorage.
● The towrope should be slightly elastic to
● Attach the towrope or towbar only to the
towline anchorages or to the removable towing bracket ››› page 184, or ››› page 79.
Fig. 84 Front bumper: towline anchorage cov-
er/fitting.
Fitting and detaching the cover
– Press on the left of the cover as indicated
by the arrow ››› Fig. 84 .
Safety
● Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
and always take care to avoid jerking the towrope. When towing on a loose surface there is
always a risk of overloading and damaging
the anchorage points.
Emergencies
reduce the load on both vehicles during towing. It is advisable to use a towrope made of
synthetic fibre or similar material only.
– Pull on the cover to remove it from the front
bumper.
– To refit the cover after unscrewing the tow-
line anchorage, fit the cover and press
»
79
Emergencies
down on its right-hand side. The cover
must be securely engaged.
Fitting and detaching the towline anchorage
– Screw in the towline anchorage anti-clock-
wise by hand as far as it will go ››› Fig. 84
.
To tighten the towline anchorage, we recommend using the box spanner, the towing eye
from another vehicle or a similar object that
can be inserted through the anchorage.
– Unscrew the towline anchorage by turning
it clockwise.
CAUTION
The towline anchorage must be screwed in as
far as it will go. Otherwise there is a risk of
the screw connection shearing off during
towing or tow-starting!
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Introduction
Due to the constant updating of vehicles,
fuse assignments based on equipment and
the use of the same fuse for various electrical
components, it is not possible to provide an
up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for
the electrical components at the time this
manual was printed. For detailed information
about the fuse positions, please consult a
technical service.
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
electrical components. Likewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Additional information and warnings:
● Working in the engine compartment
››› page 202.
80
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can
give serious electrical shocks, causing burns
and even death!
● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
tion system.
● Take care not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.
● Never repair a fuse.
● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple
or similar.
CAUTION
● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric
system, before replacing a fuse always turn
off the ignition, the lights and all electrical
elements and remove the key from the ignition.
● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating
fuse, you could cause damage to another part
of the electrical system.
Fuses and bulbs
7
Horn
8
Towing bracket - Left light
9
Controls on steering column (without Keyless Access only), engine control unit (without Keyless
Access only), automatic gearbox control unit
(without Keyless Access only), automatic gearbox lever (without Keyless Access only), ESP
control unit (without Keyless Access only), trailer
hook control unit (without Keyless Access only),
electric power steering (without Keyless Access
only)
Note
● One component may have more than one
fuse.
● Several components may run on a single
fuse.
● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These should
only be changed by a specialised workshop.
● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-
pear in the following tables.
● Some of the equipment listed in the tables
below pertain only to certain versions of the
model or are optional extras.
● Please note that the above lists, while correct at the time of printing, are subject to
change.
Fig. 85 Diagram of the fuse box to the
left/right of the steering wheel
10
Rear left window
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 43
11
Headlight washer unit
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
12
Radio and navigation display
13
Preparation as taxi
14
Control lever under steering wheel, light switch,
traction locking with ignition key (automatic
transmission), headlight flasher, SmartGate control device, rain/light sensor, rear camera
Fuse placement
No.
Consumer
1
Left light
15
Air conditioning system control unit, automatic
gearbox selector lever, diagnostics connection
2
Central locking, windscreen wipers, with Keyless
Access
16
Instrument panel
3
Ignition system relay
17
Alarm sensor, horn
4
Right light
22
Windscreen washer system (without Keyless Access)
5
Electric windows - Driver
23
Heated front seats
Technical data
Central control unit - Interior lights
Advice
ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems
with your vehicle.
Consumer
6
Operation
● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-
No.
Emergencies
Fuses in the dash panel
Safety
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to prevent the entry of dust or humidity as they can
damage the electrical system.
»
81
Emergencies
No.
Consumer
No.
Consumer
24
Air conditioning fan, heating, control unit for air
conditioning, heating
44
12 V connection in the interior, 12 V connection
in the boot
26
Front seat heating switch.
45
Rear right window
27
Rear window wiper
46
29
Airbag
Windshield and front window washing system,
control lever under the steering wheel
47
Towing bracket - Connector contact
48
Towing bracket - Right hand light
30
Electric windows, reversing light switch, air conditioning control unit, Park Assist control unit,
exterior mirror, power supply for middle button
bar, power supply for the side button bar, interior mirror
49
Fuel pump control unit
50
Radio
51
Heat for exterior mirrors
52
Keyless Access
53
Steering lock (Keyless Access)
54
ABS/ESC control unit
31
32
82
Fuel pump, radiator fan control unit, cruise control, relay coil for the windscreen and rear window washer system, switch for the lights
Diagnostics socket, headlight range regulator,
control lever under the steering wheel, ambient
lighting regulator
33
Ignition relay coil, clutch pedal switch
56
Diagnosis
34
Heatable washer jets of windscreen washer
59
Full LED
36
USB charging socket
37
Radar
39
Additional electric heating
41
Rear window heater
42
Electric windows - passenger
43
Towing bracket - Connector contact
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 86 In the engine compartment: fuse box
cover - 1st variant
Consumer
● Remove the plastic clip from the lid of the
14
Engine components, fuel coil relay, radiator fan,
coolant pump
● Replace the appropriate fuse.
15
Engine control unit
● Place the plastic clip back in its original po-
16
Starter motor
17
Engine control unit
18
Engine components, additional electric heat relay coils
19
Lambda probe
20
Control devices for the glow system, heating of
the sump fan
fuse box.
til you hear it click into place.
Fuse placement
No.
Consumer
1
Radiator fan
2
Control unit for the glow system
3
ABS/ESC control unit
4
Additional electric heat - Circuit 2
Fig. 87 In the engine compartment: fuse box
5
Additional electric heat - Circuit 3
cover - 2nd variant
6
Automatic gearbox
7
Engine control unit
8
Front windscreen wipers
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 43
Changing bulbs
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 44.
9
Central control unit, battery data module
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
there are different sets of headlights and tail
lights:
10
ABS/ESC control unit
● Halogen main headlights (double head-
Opening the fuse box
12
Engine components
● Open the bonnet  ››› page 202.
13
Brake pedal switch
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
● Press lid locking clip upwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow
1
››› Fig. 86 o ››› Fig. 87.
Emergencies
● Place the lid on the fuse box and press un-
Safety
sition.
Advice
No.
Operation
● Open the cover in the direction indicated
by the arrow 2 .
Technical data
Fuses and bulbs
light).
● Full-LED main headlights*.
● Rear bulb light.
● LED rear light*.
»
83
Emergencies
Full-LED headlight system*
Full-LED headlights handle all light functions
(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped
beam and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source.
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to
an authorised workshop to have it replaced.
WARNING
● Take particular care when working on com-
ponents in the engine compartment if the engine is warm. Risk of burns.
● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
● When changing bulbs, please take care not
to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.
Double headlight bulb change
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of
practical skill. If in doubt, we recommend you
have defective bulbs changed by a specialised service or, in case of an emergency,
seek professional assistance.
● Switch off the ignition and all of the lights
before changing a bulb.
● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit
could occur.
Double headlight bulbs
before changing a bulb.
For the sake of the environment
● A bulb must only be replaced by one of the
wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the rear
lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on the useful
life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam
of light is projected will quickly be demisted.
However, the edges may continue to be misted.
the spare wheel well or below the carpet in
the luggage compartment.
● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel
instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left on
the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat
generated by the bulb, they will be deposited
on the reflector and damage its surface.
● Switch off the lights and the parking light
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
● There is a storage area for the bulb box in
● Before changing a bulb, make sure you
have the correct new bulb.
● Remove the ignition key before working on
your bare hands. The fingerprints left on the
glass will vaporise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, reducing bulb life and
causing condensation on the reflector surface, thus reducing effectiveness.
same type. The type is indicated on the bulb,
either on the glass part or on the base.
84
CAUTION
● Please check at regular intervals that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
but also that of all other road users.
Note
● Depending on weather conditions (cold or
Fig. 88 Main headlight bulbs.
Installation position of double headlight
bulbs
A
Side lights
B
Main beam headlights
C
Dipped beam headlights
D
Turn signal lights
E
Daylight
Changing main beam headlight bulb
Changing dipped beam light bulbs
Fig. 90 Changing main beam headlight
Fig. 91 Changing dipped beam headlight
bulbs: wheel housing.
Technical data
Fuses and bulbs
bulbs.
Operation
Advice
Changing side light bulbs
– Raise the bonnet.
– Remove the protective cover.
– Remove the protective cover ››› Fig. 89.
– Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 89 1 by
pulling it outwards.
– Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit
the new one.
– Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
– Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the
cover fits correctly on the housing during
operation.
outward.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
Emergencies
– Raise the bonnet.
– Remove connector ››› Fig. 90 1 by pulling
that it fits correctly into the recess on the
reflector.
– Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
– Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the
cover fits correctly on the housing during
operation.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
Fig. 92 Changing dipped beam headlight
bulbs.
– Turn the wheel for access to the wheel
Safety
Fig. 89 Changing side light bulbs.
housing cover and remove the cover
››› Fig. 91.
– Remove the protective cover from the head-
light ››› Fig. 92.
»
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
85
Emergencies
– Remove connector ››› Fig. 92 1 by pulling
outward.
– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 92 2
pressing clockwise and inwards.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
that the lug on the base fits into the recess
on the reflector.
– Fit the connector.
– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 93 1 anti-
clockwise and remove it.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
– Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder
and turn clockwise as far as it will go.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
– Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder
and turn clockwise as far as it will go.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing the fog light bulbs
Front fog light bulb
– Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the
cover fits correctly on the housing during
operation.
Changing daytime driving light bulbs
– Replace the wheel housing cover.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing turn signal bulbs
Fig. 95 Front fog light.
Fig. 94 Changing daytime driving light bulbs.
– Raise the bonnet.
– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 94 1 anti-
clockwise and remove it.
Fig. 93 Changing turn signal bulbs.
– Raise the bonnet.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
Fig. 96 Front fog light.
86
Fuses and bulbs
– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 97 2 anti-
clockwise and pull.
– Subsequently, remove the clips located on
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
the edge of the grille with gentle leverage.
holder and turning it counter-clockwise at
the same time.
– Remove the bolts (3x) ››› Fig. 96 2 to re-
move the fog light.
– Remove the metal clip situated on the up-
per part of the fog light by pulling towards
the exterior of the vehicle ››› Fig. 96 3 .
Changing the rear lights (on
the side panel)
Technical data
light grille with a screwdriver.
Removing the rear light1)
– Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
– Check that the bulb works properly.
Advice
– Remove the bolt ››› Fig. 95 1 from the fog
Operation
Removing the bulb holder
Fig. 98 Remove the rear light unit from side
panel.
Check which of the bulbs is defective.
the rainduct area.
– Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20)
Fig. 97 Front fog light.
– Remove connector ››› Fig. 97 1 from the
bulb.
1) In the case of LED rear lights of the side panel only
the turn signal lamp can be changed. The illustrations in the manual correspond to the bulb version
and do not correspond exactly to the LED version.
from the vehicle tool kit and loosen (turning anti-clockwise) and remove the two retaining screws that secure the front of the
light ››› Fig. 98 1 , taking care not to lose
them.
»
Safety
Emergencies
– Open the luggage compartment to access
87
Emergencies
– Pull the rear light unit backward (››› Fig. 98
2
) to remove the light from its housing.
– Disconnect the light connector A
››› Fig. 99 by moving its side levers (arrows)
and pulling the connector outwards.
Removing the bulb holder
– Place the light on a level, horizontal surface
– Lightly press the defective bulb into the
bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and
remove it.
– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb
on top of a soft cloth so as not to scratch
the outer glass.
holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will
go.
– Unscrew the four retaining screws from the
– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
bulb holder anti-clockwise using a screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehicle tool kit ››› Fig. 100. Take care not to lose
the bulb holder retaining screws.
the glass part of the bulb.
– Check that the new bulb works properly.
– Replace the bulb holder.
– Screw in the bulb holder using the four
Changing bulbs
Fig. 99 Light connector at the rear of the rear
screws, turning them clockwise.
Position of the bulbs
››› Fig. 101
light unit.
Bulb function
A
Turn signals: PY21W NA LL
B
Side lights-brake lights: P21/5W
C
Side lights: P21/5W
Note
Fig. 101 Position of the bulbs in the bulb
holder
Fig. 100 Retaining screws on reverse side of
rear light unit.
88
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below gives an overview of the
bulb positions.
Check the condition of the seal. If damaged, a
replacement can be acquired from an Official
Service.
Fuses and bulbs
Technical data
– Press the rear light unit backwards (driving
direction) by fitting the fastenings into the
rubber mountings ››› Fig. 102 A .
– Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20)
Fig. 102 Fit the tail light unit.
Advice
from the vehicle tool kit and tighten (turning clockwise ››› Fig. 103) the two retaining
screws that secure the front of the light.
Changing tail lights (on the
rear lid)
Emergencies
Operation
Removing the bulb holder1)
Fig. 105 Remove the bulb holder.
The rear lid must be open to change the
bulbs.
Fig. 103 Fit the tail light unit.
– Make sure the connector is correctly in
place.
1) For rear-lid LED rear lights, only the reverse and
retro fog bulb can be replaced. The illustrations in
the manual correspond to the bulb version and do
not correspond exactly to the LED version.
Fig. 104 Remove the cover from the boot lid.
You can access the bulb holder for the inner
tail lights through the inside of the rear lid.
– Check which of the bulbs is defective.
»
Safety
Fitting the rear light
89
Emergencies
– Open the cover to access the lights, turning
– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb
it by hand in the direction indicated by the
arrows.
holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will
go.
– Access the lights by disconnecting the con-
– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
nector 1 ››› Fig. 105  and unscrewing
the bulb holder ››› Fig. 105 . Take care not
to lose the bulb holder retaining screw.
– Change the bulbs ››› page 90.
Changing bulbs
the glass part of the bulb.
– Check that the new bulb works properly.
– Re-install the bulb holder ››› page 90.
– Screw in the bulb holder.
Position of the bulbs
››› Fig. 106
Bulb function
A
Reversing lights: P21W
B
Side lights: R5W LL
C
Fog lights: P21W
Note
Fig. 106 Position of the bulbs in the bulb
One of the two sides may not be fitted with a
fog light, depending on the country and type
of driving. In this case, the hole for the light
is covered.
holder
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below gives an overview of the
bulbs ››› table on page 90.
– Lightly press the defective bulb into the
bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and
remove it.
90
Fitting the bulb-holder
– Position the bulb holder on the tail light
and align it so that it is securely seated.
– Screw in the bulb holder using the corre-
sponding screw.
– Make sure the connector is correctly in
place.
– Close the inner trim cover.
Note
Check the condition of the seal. If damaged, a
replacement can be acquired from an Official
Service.
of the arrow and outwards ››› Fig. 108.
– Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
Note
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs
have an estimated life that exceeds than that
of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an
authorised workshop for replacement.
Fig. 108 Changing the bulb.
Safety
Emergencies
Fig. 107 Removing number plate light
Advice
Removing the bulb holder
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction
Operation
Changing the bulb on the number plate
Technical data
Fuses and bulbs
– Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb
››› Fig. 107.
91
Operation
Fig. 109 Interior.
92
– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
Controls and displays
11
Control lamp for front passenger
airbag deactivated warning lamp . .
– Central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
71
– Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
12
Front passenger airbag switch . . . .
71
– Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
General instrument panel
13
Depending on the equipment,
glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . .
131
– Front passenger heated seat . . . .
128
1
Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . .
115
2
Control for adjusting electric exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
3
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
14
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . .
14
4
Multifunction switch lever:
15
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
– Turn signals, headlights, parking
lights, headlight flasher . . . . . . . .
16
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . .
117
118
17
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
– Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . .
174
18
Fuse compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
19
Steering column adjustment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
20
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
21
USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
22
Depending on the equipment:
5
– CD player* and/or SD card*
Steering wheel:
››› Booklet Radio
– With horn
6
7
8
9
– With the driver front airbag . . . . . .
14
– With controls for audio, navigation system and telephone . . . . . .
100
General instrument panel: instruments and warning lamps . . . . . . . .
93
Multifunction switch lever:
– Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . .
23
– Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
Depending on the equipment:
– Audio system
23
– Gear lever (manual gearbox) . . . .
156
– Selector lever (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
Depending on the equipment:
– Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
– Ashtray holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
24
Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
131
25
Depending on the equipment, controls for:
26
Depending on the equipment:
– Heating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
– Air conditioning controls . . . . . . . .
145
– Climatronic controls . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
Note
The location of the controls of right-hand
drive cars differs slightly from the location
shown here ››› Fig. 109. However, the symbols correspond to the respective controls.
Advice
121
– Navigation system
Operation
128
Hazard warning lights switch . . . . . .
Emergencies
– Driver heated seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Safety
Operation
Technical data
Controls and displays
93
Operation
Instruments and warning lamps
Instruments
View of instrument panel
Fig. 110 Instrument panel, on dash panel
Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 110:
1
Rev counter (with the engine running, in
hundreds of revolutions per minute).
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
counter indicates the maximum speed in
any gear after running-in and with the engine hot. However, it is advisable to
change up a gear or move the selector
lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler-
94
ator) before the needle reaches the red
zone ››› .
2
3
4
5
Engine coolant temperature display
››› page 205.
Displays on the screen.
Adjuster button and display
››› page 97.
Speedometer.
6
Fuel gauge ››› page 98.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of injury.
● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
Instruments and warning lamps
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel consumption and noise.
Rev counter
The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 110 1 .
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
speed.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates
the maximum engine speed which may be
used briefly when the engine is warm and after it has been run in properly. Before reaching this range, you should change to a higher
gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for
automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in
“D” or take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Technical data
● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus
with different setting options ›››  page 23.
CAUTION
Never allow the rev counter needle
››› Fig. 110 to go into the red zone on the
scale for more than a very brief period, otherwise there is a risk of engine damage.
1
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save
fuel and minimise emissions and engine
noise.
● Service interval display ›››  page 30.
● Second speed display ›››  page 26.
● Speed warning function ›››  page 29.
Advice
and heavy acceleration and do not make the
engine work hard.
● Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
›››  page 25.
● Start-Stop system status display
››› page 181.
● Low consumption driving status (ECO)
››› page 96
Operation
● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs
● Shift lever position ››› page 158.
● Identifying letters on engine (MKB).
Distance travelled
Indications on the display
A variety of information can be viewed on the
instrument panel display ››› Fig. 110 3 depending on the vehicle equipment:
● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open
›››  page 25.
● Information and warning texts.
● Mileage.
● Time.
● Navigation instructions.
The odometer registers the total distance
travelled by the car.
The odometer (trip) shows the distance
travelled since the last odometer reset. The
last digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.
● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 110
set the trip recorder to 0.
4
Emergencies
● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the red
zone for a short period of time.
We recommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. Consult the additional
information in ›››  page 25.
to re-
● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3
seconds and the previous value will be displayed.
»
Safety
CAUTION
● Outside temperature.
● Compass.
95
Operation
Time
Second speed display (mph or km/h)
● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 110
In addition to the speedometer, the speed
can also be displayed in a different unit of
measurement (in miles or in km per hour).
4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select
the hour or minute display.
● To continue setting the time, press the up-
per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold button down to scroll through the numbers
quickly.
● Press the button
setting the time.
4
again in order to finish
The time can also be set via the  key and
Setup function button in the Easy Connect
system ››› page 99.
Compass
With the ignition on and the navigation system on, the cardinal point corresponding to
the direction of travel of the vehicle is displayed on the instrument panel.
Selector lever position
96
This option cannot be deactivated in models
destined for countries in which the second
speed must always be visible.
The second speed display can be adjusted in
the Easy Connect system via the  key and
the Setup function button ››› page 99.
Speed warning
panel when the vehicle is in low consumption status.
Identifying letters on engine (MKB)
Hold the button ››› Fig. 110 4 down for more
than 15 seconds to display the identifying
letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do
this, the ignition must be switched on and
the engine switched off.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
and control lamps on page 98.
in Warning
When the speed setting is exceeded, this will
be indicated on the instrument panel display.
This is very useful, for example when using
winter tyres that are not designed for driving
at the maximum speed of the vehicle
›››  page 29.
● At outside temperatures above +4°C
The speed warning settings can be adjusted
in the Easy Connect system via the  key
and the Setup function button ››› page 99.
● Never rely on the outside temperature indi-
The selected gear is displayed on the side of
the selector lever and on the instrument panel display. In positions D and S, and with the
Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also displayed.
Updated information relating to the status is
displayed on the instrument panel
››› page 181.
Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
Low consumption driving status (ECO)*
The recommended gear in order to save fuel
is displayed on the instrument panel while
you are driving ›››  page 25.
Depending on the equipment, when driving,
the “ECO” display appears on the instrument
Start-Stop operating display
WARNING
Even though outside temperatures are above
freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.
(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol”
is not visible, there may still be patches of ice
on the road.
cator!
Note
● Different versions of the instrument panel
are available and therefore the versions and
instructions on the display may vary. In the
case of displays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by
the warning lamps.
Odometer
Engine cold
The odometer shows the total distance covered by the vehicle.
If only the diodes in the lower part of the
scale light up, this indicates that the engine
has not yet reached operating temperature.
Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and
do not make the engine work hard.
The trip recorder shows the distance that has
been travelled since it was last reset. It is
used to measure short trips. The last digit of
the trip recorder indicates distances of 100
metres or tenths of a mile.
The trip recorder can be set to zero by pressing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 111.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the
letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder
display. Have the fault repaired immediately,
as far as is possible.
Normal temperature
Advice
● When several warnings are active at the
same time, the symbols are shown successively for a few seconds and will stay on until
the fault is rectified.
Odometer/trip recorder
If in normal operations, the diodes light up
until the central zone, it means that the engine has reached operating temperature. At
high outside temperatures and when making
the engine work hard, the diodes may continue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This
is no cause for concern, provided the control
lamp  does not light up on the instrument
panel digital display.
Operation
● Depending on the equipment, some settings and instructions can also be carried out
in the Easy Connect system.
Technical data
Instruments and warning lamps
Heat range
set button.
The distance covered is displayed in “kilometres” or miles “m”. It is possible to change
the measurement units (kilometres
“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*.
Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions
Manual for more details.
For vehicles with no coolant temperature
gauge, a control lamp  appears for high
coolant temperatures ››› page 208. Please
note ››› .
The coolant temperature gauge 2
››› Fig. 110 only works when the ignition is
switched on. In order to avoid engine damage, please read the following notes for the
different temperature ranges.
When the diodes light up in the upper area of
the display and the control lamp appears 
on the instrument panel display, the coolant
temperature is excessive ››› page 208.
Emergencies
Fig. 111 Instrument panel: odometer and re-
CAUTION
● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
making the engine work hard for approximately the first 15 minutes when the engine
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm also depends on the outside temperature. If
necessary, use the engine oil temperature*
››› page 205 as a guide.
Safety
Engine coolant temperature display
»
97
Operation
● Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect
of the coolant. At high outside temperatures
and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri-
bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is
moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can reduce the cooling effect, which could cause
the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assistance.
panel a warning signal lights up  and an
audible signal sounds.
switch off when the engine starts running, or
while driving.
The informative display indicates:
Depending on the model, additional text
messages may be viewed on the instrument
panel display. These may be purely informative or they may be advising of the need for
action ››› page 94.
Refuel! Fuel range…km...(miles)
CAUTION
Never completely empty the tank! An irregularity in the fuel supply system can cause irregularities when the engine is running. Unburned fuel can reach the exhaust gas system, which can cause deterioration of the catalytic converter.
Fuel level gauge
Note
● Some vehicles come fitted with the fuel
gauge on the general instrument panel.
● The message on the display switches off
only after refuelling and carrying out a short
journey.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, sometimes a symbol may be displayed on the instrument panel.
When certain control and warning lamps are
lit, an audible warning is also heard.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may
cause accidents and severe injuries.
● Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Control lamps
Fig. 112 Fuel gauge.
98
Warning and control lamps
The fuel gauge ››› Fig. 112 operates only
when the ignition is switched on.
›››  page 32.
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres. When the needle reaches the fuel reserve area there are only approximately 7 litres left in the tank. In the general instrument
The control and warning lamps are indicators
of warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain functions. Some control and warning lamps come
on when the ignition is switched on, and
Read the additional information carefully
● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-
sure that there are no highly flammable materials under the vehicle that could come into
contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry
grass, fuel).
● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users. If
necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers.
Failure to heed the control lamps and text
messages when they appear may result in
faults in the vehicle.
CAR menu (Setup)
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 21
To select the settings menus, press the Easy
Connect  button and the Setup function
button.
The actual number of menus available and
the name of the various options in these menus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics
and equipment.
Pressing the menu button will always take
you to the last menu used.
When the function button check box is activated , the function is active.
Pressing the menu button  will always take
you to the last menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing those menus.
menu
ESC system
››› page 154
Tyres
››› page 219
Driver assistance
››› table on page 21
Parking and manoeuvring
››› page 167
Vehicle lights
››› table on page 21
Mirrors and windscreen wipers
››› table on page 21
Opening and closing
››› table on page 21
Multifunction display
››› table on page 21
Date and time
››› table on page 21
Units
››› table on page 21
Service
››› page 30
Factory settings
››› table on page 21
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect
system while driving could distract you from
traffic.
Advice
CAUTION
System settings (CAR)*
Page
vehicle settings
Operation
hazardous area and could cause severe injuries ››› page 202.
Function buttons in the
Emergencies
● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a
Introduction to the Easy
Connect system*
Safety
● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
Technical data
Introduction to the Easy Connect system*
99
Operation
Communications and multimedia
Steering wheel controls*
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction
module from where it is possible to control
the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
functions without needing to distract the
driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction
module:
● Audio system + telephone without voice
control version (MID): for controlling the audio functions available (radio, audio CD,
MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel.
● Audio system + telephone with voice con-
trol version (HIGH): for controlling the audio
functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,
iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system
from the steering wheel.
1)
100
Depending on the vehicle equipment.
Communications and multimedia
Advice
Technical data
Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID)
Media (except AUX)
AUX
Telephone
Navigation
A
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
B
Short press: access to the telephone menu in the instrument
panela).
Short press: access to the telephone menu in the instrument
panela).
Short press: access to the telephone menu in the instrument
panela).
Short press: answer/hang up
calls, enable/open the telephone menu.
Hold down: reject an incoming
call/switch to private mode/rediala).
Short press: access to the telephone menu in the instrument
panela).
C
Search for last station
Short press: switch to the previous song
Hold down: quick rewind
No function
No function
No function
D
Search for the next station
Short press: switch to the next
song
Hold down: fast forward
No function
No function
No function
Change menu on instrument
panela)
Change menu on instrument
panela)
Change menu on instrument
panela)
Change menu on instrument
panela)
Change menu on instrument
panela)
MID: change source
MID: change source
MID: change source
MID: change source
MID: change source
E
,
G
F
Emergencies
Radio
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Safety
Button
Operation
Fig. 113 Controls on the steering wheel.
»
101
Operation
Button
H
Radio
Turn: Next/previous presetb)
Press: Acts on the MFD
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.
Media (except AUX)
Turn: Next/previous songb)
Press: Acts on the MFD
AUX
Turn: No function
Press: Acts on the MFD
Telephone
Navigation
Turn: Acts on the MFD
Press: Confirm
Turn: Changes menu or memory
on instrument panel
Press: Operates on instrument
panel
Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH)
Fig. 114 Controls on the steering wheel.
102
Button
Radio
Media (except AUX)
AUX
Telephonea)
Navigationa)
A
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
B
Short press: access to the telephone menu on the dash panela).
Hold down: rediala)
Short press: access to the telephone menu on the dash panela).
Hold down: rediala)
Short press: access to the telephone menu on the dash panela).
Hold down: rediala)
Short press: answer/hang up
calls, enable/open the telephone menu.
Hold down: reject an incoming
call/switch to private/redial
mode
Short press: access to the telephone menu on the dash panela).
Hold down: rediala)
Telephonea)
Navigationa)
C
Search for last station
Short press: switch to the previous song
Hold down: quick rewind
No function
No functionb)
Radio/media functionality (except AUX )
D
Search for the next station
Short press: switch to the next
song
Hold down: fast forward
No function
No functionb)
Radio/media functionality (except AUX )
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Enable/disable voice controla)
Enable/disable voice controla)
Enable/disable voice controla)
No functionb)
Enable/disable voice control
Turn: Next/previous songc)
Press: Acts on the MFD or confirms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Press: Acts on the MFD or confirms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Press: Acts on the MFD or confirms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Press: Acts on the MFD or confirms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
E
,
G
H
F
Turn: Next/previous presetc)
Press: Acts on the MFD or confirms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).
c)
Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.
Advice
AUX
Operation
Media (except AUX)
Emergencies
Radio
Safety
Button
Technical data
Communications and multimedia
103
Operation
Multimedia
USB/AUX-IN input
Opening and closing
Remote control
General notes
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 9
The remote control key can
● Lock and unlock the vehicle
● The remote control function may be temporarily limited by interference from other
transmitters near the vehicle that operate on
the same frequency (e.g. mobile phone, television transmitter).
● If the central locking system or the anti-
theft alarm only responds to the remote control at a distance of less than 3 metres, then
the battery must be replaced ››› page 106.
● If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote control.
● Unlock or open the rear lid
Depending on the features and the country,
the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN connection.
The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the key. The receiver
is inside the vehicle. The remote control key
has a maximum range of 30 metres. The
range is reduced as the batteries start to lose
power.
The USB/AUX-IN input is located above the
storage compartment in the front centre console ››› Fig. 115.
The key includes a foldaway part that can be
used to manually lock or unlock the vehicle
and to start the engine.
The operating description is located in the respective Instruction Manuals of the audio
system or the navigation system.
If a lost key is replaced or the receiver is repaired or changed, the remote control key
must be adapted by an authorised SEAT dealer. Only then can the remote control key be
used again.
Fig. 115 USB/AUX-IN input.
Note
● The remote control is automatically deacti-
vated when the ignition is switched on.
104
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
Fig. 116 Remote control key
Unlocking the vehicle 
– Press button 1 .
Locking the vehicle 
– Press button 2 .
Opening and closing
– Press button 3 . Further information
››› page 114.
Unfolding the key shaft
– Press button 4 .
Folding the key shaft
– Press button 4 and fold the key shaft back
to its original position.
The turn signals will flash twice when the vehicle is unlocked. If the vehicle is unlocked
using button 1 and none of the doors or the
rear lid is opened in the following 30 seconds, the vehicle will automatically relock
and the Safe lock or the anti-theft alarm will
be activated. This function prevents the vehicle from being unlocked by mistake.
Locking indication
The turn signals will flash if the vehicle has
been correctly locked.
Should any of the doors or the rear lid remain
open when the vehicle is locked, the turn signals will only flash when they are closed.
Technical data
Keys
General notes
Advice
Unlocking the rear lid 
Do not leave people or animals in vehicles
locked from outside with the Safe lock activated: the doors and windows cannot then be
opened from the inside. Doors locked in this
manner could delay assistance in an emergency. Risk of death!
● Open the door using the key within the
next minute.
Note
● Only use the remote control when the
doors and the rear lid are locked and the vehicle is within sight.
● Do not press the lock button  on the remote control before inserting the key in the
ignition, otherwise the vehicle could be
locked by mistake. Should this occur, press
the unlock button  on the remote control.
Operation
information ››› page 107.
WARNING
Remote control synchronisation
f the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
using the remote control, the key code may
not match that of the control unit. This can
occur when the remote control buttons are
frequently pressed outside the range of the
system or if the remote control battery has
been replaced.
In this case, it must be synchronised as follows:
● Press any key on the remote control key.
Emergencies
– Press button 2 twice in 2 seconds. Further
Fig. 117 Key with remote control/Key without
remote control.
Two keys are always supplied with the vehicle. Depending on the model version, your
car may include keys without remote control
››› Fig. 117  or with remote control
››› Fig. 117 .
Safety
Deactivating the Safe lock
»
105
Operation
WARNING
● Never leave the key inside whenever you
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
leave the vehicle - even if only for a moment.
This is particularly important if children are
to remain in the vehicle. Children might start
the engine or some other electrical component, e.g. electric windows. Risk of injury!
● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
hicle key ››› Fig. 118 in the direction of the arrow ››› .
● Extract the battery from the compartment
using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 119.
● Wait until the vehicle has completely stop-
● Place the new battery in the compartment
ped before taking the key out of the ignition.
Otherwise the steering wheel may lock suddenly. Risk of accident!
as shown ››› Fig. 119, pressing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow
››› .
● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 118, pressing
CAUTION
● Each key contains electronic components
and must, therefore, be protected from dampness and strong vibrations.
Fig. 118 Vehicle key: opening the battery
compartment
● Keep the grooves in the key shaft clean.
Any dirt (fibre from clothing, dust, etc.) has a
negative impact on locks, ignition, etc.
it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite
direction to that shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
CAUTION
● If the battery is not changed correctly, the
vehicle key may be damaged.
● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the
same voltage, size and specifications.
Note
Should a key be lost, request a duplicate key
from an Authorised SEAT dealer.
Fig. 119 Vehicle key: removing the battery
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
workshop to replace the battery.
The battery is located to the rear of the vehicle key, under a cover.
106
Changing the battery
● Unfold the vehicle key shaft.
● When fitting the battery, check that the polarity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the environment.
All of the doors, the boot lid and the fuel cap
flap will1) unlock at the same time when the
central locking system is used.
Warning lamp on the driver door
Once the doors are locked, the warning lamp
will flash quickly for 2 seconds and then at a
slower rate.
If the vehicle is locked with Safe lock engaged ››› page 108, the warning lamp on the
driver door will flash quickly for 2 seconds
before switching off for 30 seconds and then
flashing at a slower rate.
If the warning lamp flashes quickly for 2 seconds and then remains switched on before
flashing at a slower rate after 30 seconds,
there is a fault in the interior monitor and
1)
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
Automatic unlock and lock
The doors and the rear lid are locked automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed
of about 15 km/h (9 mph).
The doors unlock automatically when the key
is removed from the ignition. Additionally,
the driver or front passenger can unlock the
doors by pressing the  ››› page 109 central
lock button or by pulling the front door handle.
WARNING
Locking the doors prevents intruders from
getting into the car, e.g. while waiting at intersections. However, it can also delay assistance in the event of an accident. Risk of
death!
● If the central locking system should fail to
work at any time, only the driver door can be
locked or unlocked using the key
››› page 108. All other doors and the boot
hatch can be operated manually.
– Manual release ›››  page 10.
– Manual release of the rear lid
›››  page 10.
Operation
General notes
This optional function unlocks the driver door
only. The other doors remain locked and are
only unlocked when the next command is given (unlock).
● In the event of an accident in which the airbags deploy, the doors will be automatically
unlocked for easier access and assistance.
Advice
requested at your SEAT dealer.
Individualised settings
Unlocking single doors
Central locking system
Note
● Activation of the single door setting can be
Emergencies
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote control key once the battery has been replaced, it will need to be resynchronised ››› page 105.
tow-away protection system ››› page 113. Go
to a technical service.
Safety
Note
Technical data
Opening and closing
107
Operation
Unlocking with key
Note
If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft
alarm system, you have 15 seconds from the
time the door is opened to insert the key in
the ignition and start the vehicle. If, during
these 15 seconds, the vehicle is not started,
the alarm is triggered.
Lock with key
– Turn the key in the driver door lock cylinder
Fig. 120 Key positions during vehicle locking
and unlocking.
in the reverse direction to its lock position
B ››› Fig. 120.
● The doors, the boot lid and the fuel tank
– Turn the key in the driver door in the for-
ward driving direction to its unlock position
A ››› Fig. 120.
– Pull the handle and open the door.
● All doors (driver door only on vehicles with
anti-theft alarm) are unlocked.
● The rear lid is unlocked.
● The fuel tank flap is
unlocked 1).
● The courtesy lights switch on.
● The Safe lock is deactivated.
● The driver door warning lamp stops flash-
ing (on vehicles not equipped with an antitheft system) ››› page 112.
1)
108
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
flap1) will be locked.
● The courtesy lights switch off.
● The Safe lock is immediately activated.
● Warning lamp on the driver door starts to
flash.
Note
The vehicle doors cannot be locked if the
driver door is open.
Safe Lock
The central locking system is equipped with a
Safe lock. If the vehicle is closed from outside, the door locks will automatically lock.
The warning lamp on the driver door will
flash quickly for about 2 seconds and then at
a slower rate. It is not possible to open any of
the doors from the inside or outside using
the handle. This limits the possibility of intruders getting into the vehicle.
The Safe lock can be deactivated by pressing
the lock button twice in less than 2 seconds.
If Safe lock is out of service, the control lamp
on the driver door will flash quickly for about
2 seconds before switching off for 30 seconds and then flashing at a slower rate.
The Safe lock is re-activated on unlocking
and locking the vehicle again.
If the vehicle is locked and the Safe lock is
deactivated, the vehicle can be opened from
inside by pulling on the door handle.
WARNING
Do not leave people or animals in locked vehicles with Safe lock activated: the doors and
windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Doors locked in this manner could delay
assistance in an emergency. Risk of death!
● Given that the Safe function will be activated on locking the vehicle, CHECK DEADLOCK
will be shown on the general instrument panel display. On vehicles equipped with an informative display, Caution SAFE! On-
board documentation!
Central locking button
– Press the button  ››› Fig. 121. The warning
lamp  on the button will light up.
Unlocking of all doors, the boot lid and the
fuel tank cap 1)
– Press the button  ››› Fig. 121. The warning
lamp  on the button will switch off.
If the vehicle has been locked using the central lock button.
● The rear boot lid cannot be unlocked from
the outside (security measure, e.g. when
stopped at an intersection).
● The doors can be unlocked individually by
pulling the handle.
Note
The handles and the central lock buttons will
not work if the Safe lock ››› page 108 is activated.
Advice
cally when the vehicle is locked, even if the
Safe lock is deactivated. The Vehicle interior
monitoring, however, is not activated.
Locking of all doors, the boot lid and the fuel
tank flap 1)
Operation
Note
● The anti-theft alarm switches on automati-
Technical data
Opening and closing
● The vehicle doors cannot be locked if any
● In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags activate, doors locked from the inside
will be automatically unlocked for easier access and assistance.
If the vehicle has not been locked from outside, it is possible to lock and unlock the
doors from inside by pressing the ››› Fig. 121
button, even without the key in the ignition.
1)
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
WARNING
The central locking system remains operative
when the ignition is switched off. Never leave
children unattended in the vehicle, as doors
locked from the inside delay assistance in an
emergency. Risk of sustaining fatal injuries!
Safety
Fig. 121 Central lock button.
Emergencies
of the doors are open.
109
Operation
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
with Keyless Access
valid vehicle key is required to be in an area
near ››› Fig. 122 the vehicle and one of the
sensor surfaces to be touched on the door
handles ››› Fig. 123.
General information
Fig. 122 Keyless Access locking and ignition
system: in the proximity of the car.
If a valid key is located in the proximity of the
car ››› Fig. 122, the Keyless Access lock and
ignition system gives the key entry as soon
as one of the sensor surfaces on the door
handles is touched or the push button on the
boot hatch is operated. The following features are then available without having to
use the vehicle key actively:
● Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle with
the handles on the four doors or the button
located on the boot hatch.
● Keyless-Go: engine ignition and driving. For
this to occur, there has to be a valid key inside the vehicle and the ››› page 151.
Fig. 123 Keyless Access locking and ignition
system: sensor surface A for unlocking inside the door handle and sensor surface B
for locking on the exterior of the handle.
Keyless Access is a key-free locking and ignition system to unlock and lock the vehicle
without actively using its key. For this, only a
110
Unlocking and opening the doors (KeylessEntry)
● Grip the door handle. In doing this, the
sensor surface ››› Fig. 123 A (arrow) is
touched on the handle and the vehicle unlocks.
● Open the door.
On vehicles without a "safe" system: closing
and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit)
● Switch the ignition off.
● Close the driver's door.
● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow)
on the door handle. The door being operated
must be closed.
On vehicles with a "safe" security system:
locking and unlocking doors (Keyless-Exit)
● Switch the ignition off.
● Keyless-Exit: unlocking of the vehicle with
● Close the driver's door.
one of the four door handle.
● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow)
The central locking and locking systems operate in the same way as a normal locking and
unlocking system. Only the controls change.
Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a
double flash of the indicator lights; locking
by a single flash.
The vehicle will lock again after a few seconds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open
any door or boot hatch.
on the door handle. The vehicle locks with
the "safe" security system ››› page 108. The
door being operated must be closed.
● Touch the sensor surface B twice (arrow)
on the door handle to lock the vehicle without the "safe" security system ››› page 108.
Sensors will again be enabled:
After closing, the hatch locks automatically.
In the following instances, the rear lid does
not lock automatically after closing:
● After a time.
● If the entire vehicle is unlocked.
● OR: if the boot is opened.
● If the key used last is inside the vehicle. All
vehicle indicator lights flash four times. The
vehicle will lock again after a few seconds if
no door or boot hatch are opened.
Locking the vehicle with a second key
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and
it is locked from the outside with a second
vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is
blocked for engine ignition ››› page 149. In
order to enable engine ignition, the button 
on the key inside the vehicle needs to be
pressed ››› page 104.
Automatically disabling sensors
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
long period of time, the proximity sensor on
the passenger door is automatically disabled.
If the exterior sensor on the door handle is
often activated unusually with the vehicle
● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
ton

on the key.
Convenience functions
To close all electric windows, the sun roof
and electric tilting panoramic roof with the
convenience feature, keep your finger for a
few seconds on the lock sensor surface
››› Fig. 123 B located on the exterior part of
the driver or passenger door handle until the
windows and roof close.
Opening the doors by touching the sensor
surface on the handle takes place in accordance with the settings activated on the menu
Configuration - Convenience.
CAUTION
The sensor surfaces on the door handles
could engage if hit with a water jet or high
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key
in the nearby area. If at least one of the windows is open and the sensor surface B on
one of the handle permanently activates, all
Note
● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge,
or the vehicle key battery is almost or entirely out of charge, it is likely that the vehicle
will not be able to be lock or unlocked with
the Keyless Access system. The vehicle can
be unlocked or locked manually
›››  page 9.
● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or
the system fails to detect one, a warning will
display on the dash panel screen. This could
happen if any other radio frequency signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mobile device accessory) or if the key is covered
by another object (e.g. an aluminium case).
● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a layer of salt, how the sensors on the door handles operate may be affected. If this is the
case, wash the vehicle ››› page 193.
Advice
››› page 113.
windows will close. If the water jet or steam
is briefly moved away from the sensor surface A on one of the handles and then pointed at it again, all the windows will probably
open ››› page 111, Convenience functions.
Operation
Open or close the hatch normally
locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity sensors are disabled for a time. If this only happens with the
exterior sensor on the driver's door, only this
sensor is disabled.
Emergencies
When the vehicle is locked, the hatch automatically unlocks on opening if ››› Fig. 122
there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity.
● If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic
gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear
stick is in position P.
Safety
Unlocking and locking the boot hatch
Technical data
Opening and closing
111
Operation
Child-proof locking
Anti-theft alarm system*
General notes
The anti-theft alarm system increases vehicle
protection from intruders. The system will initiate acoustic and optical warning signals
when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
Activating the alarm system
Fig. 124 Activating the childproof lock.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
from being opened from the inside. Doors
can only be opened from the outside.
The childproof lock is activated and deactivated using the ignition key.
Activating the childproof lock
– Turn the slot in the direction of the arrow
››› Fig. 124 (in the other direction on the
right-hand door).
Deactivating the childproof lock
– Turn the slot in the opposite direction of
the arrow (in the other direction on the
right-hand door).
The anti-theft alarm switches on automatically when the vehicle is locked using the remote control key or inserting the key in the
driver door. The alarm is activated around 30
seconds after the vehicle is locked.
Deactivating the alarm system
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated
when the remote control unlock button is
pressed. If the vehicle is not opened within
30 seconds after emitting the radio frequency signal, the system will be reactivated.
If the vehicle is unlocked using by inserting
the key in the driver door, the ignition must
be switched on within 15 seconds. This deactivates the alarm system. If, during these 15
seconds, the vehicle is not started, the alarm
is triggered.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The following areas of the vehicle are monitored:
● Bonnet
● Rear lid
● Doors
● Ignition
● Tilt angle ››› page 113, Vehicle interior
monitoring and anti-tow system
● The interior ››› page 113, Vehicle interior
monitoring and anti-tow system
● Drop in voltage in the car systems
● The factory-fitted towing bracket
The alarm is triggered immediately if one of
the battery cables is disconnected while the
alarm system is active.
How to turn OFF the alarm
To deactivate the alarm, press the unlock button on the remote control key or switch on
the ignition.
Note
● The alarm horn power supply has a 5-year
useful life. Contact an Official Service for
more detailed information.
● To make sure that the anti-theft alarm is
fully operative when leaving the vehicle,
check that all the doors and windows are
closed.
112
Note
● The vehicle interior monitoring system and
the tow-away protection system must be deactivated if there is a danger of the alarm being triggered due to movements by children
or animals in the interior when being transported (e.g. by boat or by train) or towed.
Fig. 125 Button for vehicle interior monitor-
ing and the tow-away protection system.
The Vehicle interior monitoring system is activated if movements are detected in the interior of the vehicle.
Deactivating Vehicle interior monitoring and
the tow-away protection system
– Switch the ignition off.
– Open the driver door.
››› Fig. 125 button on the centre column. The red backlit symbol  on
the button turns orange.
– Press the 
● The effectiveness of the Vehicle interior
monitoring system is reduced if the spectacle
case is left open. Always close the storage
compartment before locking the vehicle to
ensure that this monitoring system operates
correctly.
Rear lid
Tailgate automatic lock
Where the vehicle has been locked by pressing the  button on the remote control with
the boot lid open, the boot lid will lock automatically when closed.
Where required, the automatic boot lid locking time extension function can be activated
or deactivated at a SEAT Authorised Service,
which will provide all of the necessary information.
Before the vehicle locks automatically, there
is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle.
Therefore, we recommend you always lock
the vehicle by pressing the  button on the
remote control or by using the key without remote control ››› page 108
Advice
The Vehicle interior monitoring system and
the tow-away protection system are reactivated when the vehicle is unlocked again.
unlocked by pressing the  button on the
remote control key 2 ››› page 104, the boot
lid can be re-opened for a certain length of
time.
Operation
onds.
Emergencies
Vehicle interior monitoring and antitow system
– Lock the vehicle within the next 30 sec-
Safety
● Remote control and receiver unit coding
means that the remote control cannot be
used on other vehicles.
Technical data
Opening and closing
The automatic rear lid locking time extension
function can be activated. When this function
is activated and once the boot lid has been
113
Operation
Rear lid
This system may or may not be operative, depending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be
opened, however if it is unlocked then the
opening system is operative and the rear lid
may be opened.
To change the locking / unlocking status,
press the button  or the button 1
››› Fig. 116 on the remote control key.
Fig. 126 Rear lid: opening from the outside.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the boot lid is open or not properly
closed.* An audible warning is also given if
the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is
moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
WARNING
● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of
accident or injury.
● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down
with your hand on the rear window. The glass
could smash. Risk of injury!
● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.
Fig. 127 Close-up of the inside trim of the
rear lid: hand grip
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 10
The rear lid opening system operates electrically. It is activated by using the handle on
the boot lid.
114
If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving.
● Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected
to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal
consequences. Close and lock both the rear
lid and all the other doors when you are not
using the vehicle.
● Closing the rear lid without observing and
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and to third parties. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the rear lid.
● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the
interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave
the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened
if the key is left inside.
Note
● Once the rear lid is closed, its lock is en-
gaged and the alarm system is activated. Only valid if the vehicle has been locked before
the rear lid is closed.
● The release catch located at the top of the
registration plate recess is deactivated on accelerating or at speeds of over 5 km/h (3
mph). The catch is reactivated when the vehicle comes to a standstill and a door is
opened.
Opening and closing
Press the safety button 5 ››› Fig. 128 to deactivate the controls on the rear doors. Pressing the safety button 5 again will reactivate
the controls on the rear doors.
If the rear door controls are deactivated, the
warning lamp  on the safety button 5 will
light up.
WARNING
Fig. 128 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the windows.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 11
The electric window opening and closing system only works when the ignition is switched
on.
Opening
– Press gently on the respective button on
the door to open the window. The process
will stop when the button is released.
– The driver door window can also be auto-
matically opened by pressing the button as
far as it will go (fully open). Press the button again to immediately stop it.
● When locking the vehicle from the outside,
make sure that nobody is inside the vehicle,
as the windows cannot be opened from the
inside in an emergency.
● For safety reasons, use safety button 5
››› Fig. 128 that deactivates the window
switches on the rear doors when children are
travelling in the rear seats.
CAUTION
● Keep the windows clean to ensure the sys-
tem operates correctly.
● Defrost ››› page 196, Windows and mirrors
any frozen windows before use. Otherwise
you run the risk of damaging the electric window riser mechanism.
Technical data
Note
● The vehicle heating and ventilation system
should be used to ventilate the interior while
driving. Leaving the windows open could allow dust and other dirt to enter the vehicle
and cause unpleasant noises at certain
speeds.
Advice
Safety button 
● Do not leave the side windows open at high
speeds, as this will overly increase fuel consumption.
Operation
the window. The process will stop when the
button is released.
● Always make sure all of the windows are
closed on leaving the locked vehicle.
Note
The electric window opening mechanism is
equipped with a thermostat switch. This may
overheat if the window is opened and closed
repeatedly. This causes the window to lock
temporarily. Once the thermostat switch has
cooled down, the window can be operated
once again.
Emergencies
Operation of the electric windows
Closing
– Press the respective button gently to close
Roll-back function on the electric windows
The electric windows are equipped with a
roll-back system that reduces risk of injury
when closing windows.
»
Safety
Opening and closing of electric
windows
115
Operation
If an obstacle is present, the closing mechanism will stop and the window will roll back a
few centimetres.
If an obstacle prevents closing for the next
10 seconds, the closing mechanism will once
again stop and the window will roll back another few centimetres.
If in the next 10 seconds you attempt to close
the window after it has rolled back the second time, only the closing mechanism will be
stopped even if the obstacle is still present.
The roll-back function is still connected.
The roll-back function will only be disconnected if you once again attempt to close the
window in the following 10 seconds. In this
case, the window will close at full force.
If you wait for a further 10 seconds, the rollback function will be once again connected.
Lights and visibility
Lights
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 18
The location of the controls of right-hand
drive cars differs slightly from the location
shown here ››› Fig. 129 ››› page 117. However, the symbols indicating the respective positions of the controls remain the same.
WARNING
Never drive with only the side lights on! The
side lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other
road users are able to see you. Always use
your dipped beam headlights if it is dark or if
visibility is poor.
CAUTION
● Use the lights in line with local law.
● However, drivers always remain responsi-
ble for correctly adjusting and using the
lights.
Note
● An audible warning will be heard when the
light control is set to  and you remove the
116
ignition key and open the door. Once the
driver door is closed (ignition off), the audible warning will stop, whereas the side lights
will remain on to light up the stationary vehicle in case this is necessary.
● Depending on weather conditions (cold or
wet), the lights may mist up temporarily on
the inside. This is particularly the case in the
event of a difference in temperature between
the inside and in front of the light. By switching on the lights, the area through which the
beam of light is projected will quickly be
demisted, although the edges may remain
misted. The real lights and turn signals can
mist up. This has no influence on the useful
life of the lighting system.
Control lamps

It lights up
Rear fog light switched on ››› page 120.

It lights up
Front fog lights* switched on ››› page 120.

It lights up
Left or right turn signal.
The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal
is faulty ››› page 118.

It lights up
Side light and dipped beam headlight
Main light range control 
Fig. 129 Instrument panel: light control.
Fig. 130 Instrument panel: light range con-
Technical data
Lights and visibility
Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 118.

It lights up
Note
The rear side lights and number plate light
contain several bulbs. The control lamp 
lights up only when there is a fault in all the
number plate bulbs or side light bulbs (of a
combined tail light). Therefore it is advisable
to regularly check the bulb operation.
Switching on dipped beam
– Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position
.
Switching off lights (except daytime driving
lights)
– Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position
0.
Operation
in Warning
– Turn the control ››› Fig. 130 to set the lights
to the required setting.
.
Positions
The control positions roughly correspond to
the following vehicle load conditions.
-
Two front occupants, luggage compartment empty.
1
All seats occupied, luggage compartment
empty.
2
All seats occupied, luggage compartment
fully loaded.
3
Driver only, luggage compartment fully
loaded.
Emergencies
– Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
and control lamps on page 98.
trol.
Switching on side lights
Safety
Several warning and control lamps light up
for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.
Advice
Bulb failure ››› page 83
For example, the information display indicates:
Check front right dipped headlight!
CAUTION
Always adjust the range of the lights so that:
»
117
Operation
● Your vehicle does not dazzle others, particularly oncoming traffic
Switching the daytime running light off
● The range of the headlights is sufficient for
turn signal lever down (left turn signal), press
it back to flash position and hold it here.
safe driving
● Remove the key from the ignition, press the
Note
Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your country.
● Insert the key and switch on the ignition,
Make sure you set the range of the main
lights when the dipped beam headlights are
switched on.
holding it in this position for 3 seconds.
Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime
running light is now deactivated and the corresponding lights cannot come on.
Daytime running lights
OR: activate and deactivate the daytime
lights using the Easy Connect system
›››  page 21.
Note
Daytime running lights are signalling devices
for improving road safety. The lights are built
into the headlights and come on each time
the ignition is turned on if the light switch is
in position 0 or  ››› Fig. 129. It is automatically switched off when the side lights are
turned on.
Switching the daytime driving lights on
● Remove the key from the ignition, move the
turn signal lever upward (right turn signal),
press it back to flash position and hold it
there.
● Insert the key and switch on the ignition,
holding it in this position for 3 seconds.
Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime
running light is now activated and the corresponding lights can come on.
118
Turn signal and main beam lever
Automatic control of the dipped beam in
combination with the daytime running lights
If the dipped beam control and the daytime
running lights are activated at the same
time, the dipped beams and the instrument
panel lighting will automatically come on as
required (e.g. when entering a tunnel) and
the daytime running lights will switch off.
When the automatic dipped beam control
switches off the dipped beams (e.g. when
coming out of a tunnel), the daytime running
lights come back on.
WARNING
The rear lights do not come on with the daytime driving light. A vehicle which does not
have the rear lights on may not be visible to
other drivers in the darkness, if it is raining
or in conditions of poor visibility.
Fig. 131 Turn signal and main beam lever.
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the parking lights and the headlight
flasher.
Right and left-hand  turn signal 
● Move the lever ››› Fig. 131 up 1 or down
2
.
● Keep the lever held down at the point of re-
sistance for the turn signals to flash for as
long as you hold the lever, e.g. when changing lanes.
● If the convenience turn signals are operat-
In vehicles that do not have the corresponding menu, this function can be deactivated in
a specialised workshop.
Main beams 
● Switch on the dipped beam ››› page 117.
● Press the lever ››› Fig. 131 forward in the di-
rection indicated by arrow
3
.
● Pull the lever back to its original position in
the direction indicated by arrow
the main beam off.
4
to switch
Headlight flasher 
● Pull the lever ››› Fig. 131 towards the steer-
ing wheel (point of resistance) in the direction indicated by arrow 4 .
Parking lights 
● Instructions for use ››› page 121.
Note
ing (three flashes) and the other convenience
turn signals are switched on, the active part
stops flashing and only flashes once in the
new part selected.
● The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corresponding warning lamp  or  flashes in the general instrument panel.
● The turn signals switch off automatically
when the steering wheel is returned to the
straight-ahead position.
● If a turn signal bulb is defective, the control
lamp flashes at double speed.
Automatic dipped beam control 
Automatic headlights in case of rain
If the light switch is in position  and is
connected to the automatic wipe in case of
rain for more than 10 seconds or wipe (position 2 or 3 ) for longer than 15 seconds,
››› page 125 then the side lights and headlights will automatically switch on.
The light automatically switches off if more
than 4 minutes have elapsed and the automatic wipe or wipe (position 2 or 3 ) have
not been switched on.
Advice
The convenience turn signals are activated
and deactivated in the Easy Connect system
via the  key and the Setup function button
››› page 99.
Operation
Never use the main beam headlights or the
headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
drivers.
If the light switch is in position , the symbol  located next to the light switch will illuminate. If the light illuminates automatically, symbol  located next to the light switch
will also illuminate.
CAUTION
Do not cover the windscreen light sensor with
stickers or similar objects; this could impair
operation.
Emergencies
CAUTION
For the convenience turn signals, move the
lever as far as possible upwards or downwards and release the lever. The turn signal
will flash three times.
If the light switch is in this position 
››› Fig. 129, the side lights, headlights and
the number plate lights will turn on or off automatically.
The light is adjusted according to the data recorded by the light sensor that is installed
between the windscreen and the inside rear
view mirror.
Safety
Convenience turn signals
Technical data
Lights and visibility
119
Operation
Front fog lights*
Front fog lights with cornering function*
3 Not valid for vehicles fitted with Full-LED lights
Front fog lights with cornering function provide better lighting of the area around the car
when driving through a corner or parking,
etc.
Fig. 132 Instrument panel: light switch.
Switching on front fog lights
– First turn the light switch ››› Fig. 132 to po-
sition ,  or .
– Pull on the light switch to position 1 .
The  warning lamp lights up on the general
instrument panel if the front fog lights are
switched on.
120
1) In the event of a conflict between both functions,
i.e. if you turn the steering wheel to the left while the
right-hand turn signal is on, the turn signals will take
priority.
Front fog lights with cornering function
switch on depending on how far you turn the
steering wheel or whether or not the turn signals1) are switched on, if the following conditions are met:
● The vehicle is stationary, the ignition is
switched on or you are moving at a speed of
less than 40 km/h (25 mph);
● The daytime driving light is switched off
● The dipped beam is switched on
● The fog lights are switched off
● Reverse gear is not engaged
Rear fog light
Switching on the rear fog light
– First turn the light switch ››› Fig. 132
››› page 120 to position ,  or .
– Pull on the light switch to position 2 .
If the vehicle is not equipped with front fog
lights ››› page 120, the rear fog light is
switched on by turning the switch to position
 or  and pulling it to position 2 . This
type of switch only has one position.
The  ››› page 98 warning lamp lights up on
the general instrument panel if the rear fog
lights are switched on.
If you are towing a trailer or caravan equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a
factory-fitted towing bracket or one installed
using parts from the original SEAT parts
catalogue, only the rear fog light on the trailer or caravan will light up.
Lights and visibility
● The light switch is in position 
The light is automatically switched on when
the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control.
The light is switched off after 10 seconds or
when the vehicle is locked.
››› page 119.
● The visibility around the vehicle is reduced.
● The ignition is switched off.
Hazard warning lights switch
The light is automatically switched on when
the driver door is opened (for 60 seconds after the ignition is switched off).
Technical data
● When reaching the tail end of a traffic jam
are involved in an emergency situation.
Parking lights*
The light is adjusted according to the data recorded by the light sensor that is installed
between the windscreen and the inside rear
view mirror.
“Coming Home” function
Note
Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users, for example:
● if the vehicle has a technical fault or you
To turn on this function, switch on the headlight flasher prior to exiting the vehicle.
The function automatically turns on the side
lights and headlights, the lighting for the entry area on the exterior mirrors and the number plate light.
The hazard warning lights come on automatically in the event of an accident in which an
airbag is triggered.
Advice
“Leaving Home” function
Operation
The function is automatically turned on if the
following conditions are met:
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the
light will switch off after 60 seconds.
at the same time as the turn signals when
the hazard warning lights are switched on.
The hazard warning lights also work when
the ignition is switched off.
Parking lights 
Emergencies
This function makes it possible, under poor
visibility conditions, to automatically turn on
the lights for a brief period of time after the
vehicle has been parked or when approaching the vehicle.
The lights is switched off when all the doors
and the boot lid are closed.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Move the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 131
››› page 118 up or down to turn on the right
or left-hand parking lights respectively.
Fig. 133 Instrument panel: switch for hazard
warning lights.
– Press the button  ››› Fig. 133 to switch
the hazard warning lights on or off.
Parking light on both sides
– Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 
››› page 117 to position  and engage the
steering lock.
»
Safety
Function “Coming Home”/“Leaving
Home”*
The warning lamps on the instrument panel
and the warning lamp on the switch will flash
121
Operation
Note
● The parking lights  can only be activated
with the ignition disconnected.
● The parking light will not come on automat-
ically after switching off the ignition if the
left- or right-hand turn signal is left on.
Adjusting the headlights
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is
asymmetric: the side of the road on which
you are driving is lit more intensely.
Note
“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If
you are planning a long stay in a country that
drives on the other side, you should take the
vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to
change the headlights.
Interior lights
Interior lighting
The light distribution of the halogen and fullLED headlights of the SEAT Toledo allows the
specific “tourist light” values to be met without the need for stickers or changes in the
settings.
122
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 20
When a car that is manufactured in a country
that drives on the right travels to a country
that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is normally necessary to cover part of the headlight
bulbs with stickers or to change the adjustment of the headlights to avoid dazzling other drivers.
In such cases, the regulations specify certain
light values that must be complied with for
designated points of the light distribution.
This is known as “Tourist light”.
Fig. 135 Interior lighting – version 2.
Where the courtesy light is on (switch
A
››› Fig. 134 in position ), the light will come
on if:
● the vehicle is unlocked,
● one of the doors is opened,
● The key is removed from the ignition
Fig. 134 Interior lighting – version 1.
When the courtesy light is on (switch A in
position ), the light will switch off if:
● the vehicle is locked,
● the ignition is switched on,
● 30 seconds after all of the doors have been
closed
If a door is left open or if switch A is in the
 position, the interior lighting switches off
after about 10 minutes to prevent the battery
from running flat.
Lights and visibility
Lighting settings > Vehicle interior lighting ›››  page 21.
Visibility
Technical data
Rear interior light
Heated rear window
Glove box light
Interior lights / ambient light*
When the dipped beam is on the ambient
lighting lights up the central console area,
the door handles, the storage pockets in the
front doors, the footwell area and the instrument panel trim.
The lighting of the central console area and
the footwell area will switch on fully when the
doors are opened and will decrease in intensity while driving with the dipped beam
headlights on.
The intensity of the ambient light* can be adjusted using the menu Easy Connect >
The light switches on automatically when the
boot is open and switches off automatically
10 minutes after the boot lid has been
opened.
Operation
Luggage compartment light
Fig. 137 Heated rear window switch.
– Switch the heated rear window on or off by
pressing the button  ››› Fig. 137, the
warning lamp in the button will come on or
go off respectively.
Emergencies
Press the button ››› Fig. 136 to switch the
lighting on or off.
The heated rear window only works when the
engine is running.
After approximately 7 minutes, the heating
device of the rear window switches off automatically.
For the sake of the environment
The heated rear window should be switched
off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel
››› page 162.
Safety
Fig. 136 Rear interior light.
Advice
The light will come on automatically when
the glove compartment is opened. The light
will go out when the glove compartment is
closed.
»
123
Operation
Note
In the event of a drop in voltage in the onboard systems, the heated rear window
switches off automatically to ensure enough
power to control the engine ››› page 214, Automatic disconnection of electrical equipment.
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver and the front
passenger can be pulled out of their central
supports and turned towards the doors in the
direction of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 138 and 2
››› Fig. 139 respectively.
The strip A is to store small objects such as
notepaper, etc.
The front passenger sun visor includes a vanity mirror B with a cover. The cover is
opened by sliding it in the direction indicated
by arrow 3 ››› Fig. 139.
WARNING
Do not turn sun visors with attached objects
such as ball-pens, etc. toward the head protection airbag triggering zone on the side
windows. The head protection airbags could
injure occupants if triggered.
Fig. 138 Driver's sun visor.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers
Introduction
The windscreen wipers and windscreen
washers only work when the ignition is
switched on.
Fig. 139 Front passenger's sun visor.
124
The speed of the automatic wipe in case of
rain is automatically adjusted according to
the intensity of the rainfall.
The rear window is wiped once if the windscreen wipers are switched on and reverse
gear is engaged.
Fill the windscreen washer fluid ››› page 210.
WARNING
● Make sure the blades ›››  page 53 are in
perfect condition for good visibility and safe
driving.
● In cold conditions, you should not use the
wash/wipe system unless you have warmed
the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The windscreen washer fluid
could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and
obscure your view of the road.
CAUTION
● During winter, always check that the wind-
screen wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before each trip or before switching on
the ignition. If you switch on the windscreen
wipers when the wiper blades are frozen to
the glass, this could damage both the wiper
blades and the wiper motor.
● If the ignition is switched off when the
windscreen wipers are on, they will start operating in the same mode when the ignition
is switched back on. The wiper blades may be
frozen to the glass at low temperatures when
the ignition is switched off.
● Carefully separate the frozen wipers from
the windscreen or rear window.
Lights and visibility
Operating windscreen wipers and
washers
● Careless handling could lead to the wiper
Slow wipe
Technical data
● Remove snow and ice from the wipers before starting your journey.
– Push the lever up to position 2
››› Fig. 140.
arms damaging the windscreen.
Continuous wipe
● For safety reasons, the wiper blades should
be changed once or twice a year. They can be
purchased at a SEAT Authorised Service.
– Push the lever up to position 3
the windscreen wiper arms are in a raised position. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers
would return to their original position and
could damage the paintwork on the bonnet.
washer jets, these are heated once the engine is running.
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel,
position 5 ››› Fig. 140, and the windscreen
washer and wipers are switched on.
Fig. 140 Window wiper lever.
Short wipe
– Give the windscreen a brief wipe by moving
the lever down to position
4
››› Fig. 140.
Wipe intervals/automatic wipe in case of rain
rain sensor*
– Push the lever up to position 1
››› Fig. 140.
– With switch A , adjust the wipe interval or
rain sensor sensitivity.
Switch
A
has 4 positions.
The rain sensor* is part of the intermittent
wipe function.
The rain sensor* controls the frequency of
the windscreen wiper intervals, depending
on the amount of rain.
Operation
– Release the lever. The washer will stop and
the windscreen wipers will keep running for
1-3 wipes (depending on the windscreen
washer operating time).
Rear window wiper*
– Press the lever forward to position 6
Emergencies
● On vehicles equipped with windscreen
Automatic windscreen wash and wipe
››› Fig. 140 and the rear window wiper will
run every 6 seconds.
Automatic rear window wash and wipe*
– Press the lever fully forward to position 7
››› Fig. 140 and the rear window wiper and
washer switch on at the same time.
Safety
Note
Keep the wipers clean. The wipers can be
soiled with remains of wax solutions from car
washes ››› page 194.
Advice
››› Fig. 140.
● The ignition cannot be switched on while
– Release the lever. The rear window washer
will stop and the rear window wipers will
keep running for 1-3 wipes (depending on
the jet operating time). When released, the
lever remains in position 6 .
»
125
Operation
Switching off the wipers
– Move the lever to position 0
››› Fig. 140.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
to switch on the wipers.
● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually
when water on the windscreen obstructs visibility.
Note
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front
of the rain sensor*. This may cause sensor
disruption or faults.
CAUTION
Never pull on the nozzle holders. Risk of
damage to the system!
Mirrors
Rear view mirror with manual antidazzle device
Basic settings
– Push the lever at the bottom of the mirror
forward.
Rear vision mirror anti-dazzle setting
Headlight washers*
The headlight washers operate briefly if the
dipped headlights or headlights are on and
the lever is moved to position 5 ››› Fig. 140.
The headlight washer system also operates
every 10 windscreen wash cycles.
Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the
headlights at regular intervals, for instance
when filling the fuel tank. Please observe the
following indications ››› page 196, Headlights.
To ensure the system works properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders free of snow and
remove any ice with a de-icer spray.
126
– Pull the lever at the bottom of the mirror to-
wards you.
Exterior mirrors
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 13
Before beginning any journey, adjust the rear
view mirrors for a good rear visibility.
WARNING
● Convex (wide-angle) rear vision mirrors give
a larger field of vision. However, they make
objects appear smaller and further away than
they really are. For this reason, you should
not rely on these rear vision mirrors for judging the distance of vehicle behind.
● If possible, use the interior rear vision mir-
ror to estimate distances to vehicles behind
you.
Note
● Exterior mirrors are only heated when the
engine is running.
● Do not touch the exterior mirrors when the
heating system is running.
● If the electrical adjustment should ever fail
to operate, the rear vision mirrors can be adjusted by hand by pressing the edge of the
mirror glass.
● Visit the technical service in the event of a
fault in the electrical rear vision mirror adjustment system.
Set the driver seat in such a way that the
pedals can be fully depressed with your legs
slightly bent.
Set the driver seat backrest so that you can
reach the upper point of the steering wheel
with your arms slightly bent.
amount of people in your vehicle.
● Every occupant in the vehicle must properly
fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to
his or her seat. Children must be protected
with an appropriate child restraint system
››› page 72, Transporting children safely.
belts must always be adjusted to the size of
the vehicle occupant to provide you and your
passengers with the greatest possible protection.
● Your feet should remain in the footwell
gue,
● maximum protection from the seat belts
● It is important for the driver and front pas-
● a relaxed posture that will not produce fati-
and airbag system
WARNING
● Adjust the driver seat only when the vehi-
cle is stationary. Risk of accident!
● Be careful when adjusting the front seats!
Careless and uncontrolled adjustment can
cause injuries.
Note
After a certain time, the backrest angle adjustment mechanism may gain a certain
amount of play.
● The front seats, head restraints and seat
while the vehicle is moving; never rest them
on the dash panel, on the window or on the
seat! This also applies to passengers. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden
braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due
to an incorrect sitting position!
The correct seat position is very important
for:
● reaching all of the controls safely and
quickly,
ger seat other than those allowed (e.g. child
seat). Risk of accident!
Advice
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 11
● Do not place any items on the front passen-
senger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm
from the steering wheel and dash panel. Failure to respect the minimum distance means
that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of
fatal injury if triggered!
Operation
Introduction
● Never transport more than the permitted
clutch, brake or accelerator from being pressed.
Emergencies
Adjusting seats and head restraints
● The backrests must not be reclined too far
back while driving. This could limit the effect
of the seat belts and the airbag system. Risk
of injury!
Safety
Seats and head restraints
Technical data
Seats and head restraints
● Objects must not be placed in the footwell,
as they could move to the area of the pedals
in the event of a braking manoeuvre or
change of direction. This would prevent the
127
Operation
head restraints
Fitting and removing head restraints on front
seats
– Push the head restraint up as far as it will
go.
– Press catch 1
››› Fig. 141 and remove the
head restraint.
WARNING
– To refit, insert the head restraint into the
holes in the backrest, pushing it down until
it engages.
Fig. 141 Front head restraint: adjust or re-
move.
Fitting and removing head restraints on rear
seats
To remove the head restraint, the corresponding backrest must be partially folded forward.
– Unlock the backrest ››› page 130
– Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-
rives to the top.
– Press button 1
The head restraint must be adjusted in line
with the height of users. Correct adjustment
of the head restraint, together with the seat
belts, ensure effective passenger protection
››› page 56.
››› Fig. 142, while simulta-
neously pressing on the security hole
● Badly adjusted head restraints increase the
risk of injuries in the event of an accident.
● Never drive with the head restraints re-
moved. Risk of injuries!
● If the seats are in use, never drive with the
rear head restraints in their out-of-use position.
Seat functions
Heated front seats*
2
››› Fig. 142 with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head
restraint.
Fig. 142 Rear centre head restraint: release
point.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 12
Head restraints cannot be moved up or down
or removed on sports seats.
128
– To refit, insert the head restraint into the
holes in the backrest, pushing it down until
it engages.
For maximum head restraint protection, adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge
is at the same level as the top of your head.
Fig. 143 Heated front seats.
Seats and head restraints
bag, etc. This could lead to a fault in the seat
heating elements.
Press the  or  ››› Fig. 143 button to switch
on and adjust the heated front seats.
››› page 197.
WARNING
Do not use the heated seat if your perception
of pain and/or temperature or that of your
passenger is limited, e.g. due to medication,
paralysis or chronic illness (e.g. diabetes). It
could cause burns on the back, buttocks and
legs that are difficult to heal. If you still want
to use the heated seat, take frequent breaks
on long journeys so that the body can recover
from the trip. Ask your doctor about your particular situation.
Note
● Only connect the heated seats when the
Advice
engine is running. This provides considerable
savings on the battery capacity.
● In the event of a drop in voltage in the on-
board systems, the heated seats switch off
automatically to ensure enough power to control the engine ››› page 214, Automatic disconnection of electrical equipment.
Operation
Press the button again to reduce the force of
the heating and switch it off. The force is indicated by the number of warning lamps lit on
the button.
● Do not clean the seats with anything damp
Emergencies
Press once to connect the heating at maximum force.
Armrest on front seats with inner storage*
Technical data
The cushion and backrest of the front seats
can be heated electrically.
CAUTION
● To avoid damaging the heating elements,
● Do not use the heated seats if nobody is
sitting on them or if there are items attached
to or lying on them, such as a child seat or a
Fig. 144 Armrest/Opening and closing the
Safety
do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion or
backrest.
storage compartment.
Adjusting armrest height
– Lift the armrest as far as it will go and then
fold it downward.
»
129
Operation
– Raise the armrest until it engages in one of
the 5 positions.
Folding down the backrest
such a way that they cannot be soiled or
damaged.
– Insert the seat belt latch plate into hole A
Opening storage compartment
››› Fig. 146 located on the corresponding
– Press the button located on the front of the
side of the vehicle – safety position.
armrest ››› Fig. 144 - .
– Press the lock button B to unlock the
– Lift the storage compartment lid ››› Fig. 144
backrest and fold it forward.
- .
Returning to the initial position
– Where the head restraint has been re-
Armrest on rear seats
moved, insert it into the backrest when partially raised.
– Push the backrest backwards to its original
position until the lock button engages –
check that it is locked by pulling on the
backrest ››› .
– Make sure the red protruding part C is not
visible.
WARNING
Fig. 145 Rear seats: armrest.
The armrest can be folded away for greater
comfort using the handle ››› Fig. 145.
130
Fig. 146 Unlocking the backrest.
● Once the backrests have been lifted, the
Folding
seat belts and their buckles must be in their
initial position – ready for use.
– Before folding the rear seats, adjust the po-
● The backrests must be safely locked to en-
sition of the front seats so that the rear
seats are not damaged. When the front
seats are adjusted to the rear position,
their head restraints should be removed
before folding the backrests on the rear
seats. Store the removed head restraints in
sure any items in the boot cannot move
around the interior of the vehicle in the event
of a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk of injuries!
● Make sure the rear backrests are correctly
locked. Only then will the three-point automatic seat belt on the rear central seat work
correctly.
Transport and practical equipment
Passenger side storage compartment
Technical data
– Pull the catch on the lid in the direction in-
dicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 147 and open
the lid.
– Close the lid and push it until it engages.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD
player is located in the glove compartment.
Separate operating instructions are enclosed
for this equipment in the corresponding Instruction Manual.
Advice
Practical equipment
Opening and closing passenger side glove
compartment
Operation
Glove compartment cooling*
Open or close the air outlet by turning the
thumbwheel ››› Fig. 148.
Fig. 147 Instrument panel: passenger side
glove compartment.
If the air outlet is open and the air conditioning is on, the cooled air will be released into
the glove compartment.
Emergencies
Take care when handling the rear backrests
so as not to damage the seat belts. The seat
belt must never be left behind the lifted backrest.
Transport and practical
equipment
If the air outlet is open and the air conditioning is off, outdoor air (not conditioned) will
be released into the glove compartment.
The air outlet should be closed if the air conditioning is being used in heating mode or
where glove compartment cooling is not in
use.
Safety
CAUTION
WARNING
Fig. 148 Storage: cooling control.
● For safety reasons, all storage compart-
ments must be closed while the vehicle is
moving.
»
131
Operation
● Never place any objects on the instrument
panel. These objects could be flown around
the interior while the vehicle is moving (on
accelerating or turning) and distract you. Risk
of accident!
● Make sure objects remain in the centre con-
sole or other compartments while the vehicle
is moving. Otherwise, this could prevent you
from braking, changing gear or accelerating.
Risk of accident!
Note
The glove compartment can hold a bottle no
larger than 1 litre.
Storage compartment for reflective
vest
WARNING
The compartment is solely designed to store
the reflective vest and no other objects. Objects falling out of the storage compartment
could limit or prevent use of the pedals.
CAUTION
The compartment is solely designed to store
the reflective vest and no other objects, since
there is a risk of damaging the storage compartment.
Storage pocket under the front seats
There is a storage pocket on the rear part of
the backrest of the front seats.
These pockets are designed to hold maps,
magazines, etc.
WARNING
Do not place heavy objects in the pockets.
Risk of injury!
CAUTION
Fig. 149 Driver's seat: storage compartment
There is a compartment below the driver seat
››› Fig. 149 to store the reflective vests.
132
Drink holder in the centre console
Do not place overly large objects in the pockets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp edges.
Risk of damage to the pockets and the upholstery.
Fig. 150 Centre console: drink holder
A
Front drink holder in the centre console
B
Rear drink holder in the centre console
WARNING
● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.
They could spill while the vehicle is moving.
Risk of scalding!
moved. Therefore, never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Note
CAUTION
● The 12 V power socket of the cigarette
Avoid putting open drinks containers in the
drink holder while the vehicle is moving.
They could spill (e.g. on braking) and cause
damage to the electrical equipment or the
seat covers.
Drink holder in rear seat armrest
lighter can also be used as a power source for
electrical appliances ››› page 134, 12V Power
socket.
● Additional information ››› page 192, Accessories and modifications to the vehicle.
Advice
Cigarette lighter*
Fig. 152 Centre console: lighter
The cigarette lighter is located at the front of
the centre console ››› Fig. 152.
Using the cigarette lighter
Operation
● Do not use cups or glasses made of fragile
materials (e.g. glass or china). These could
cause injury in the event of an accident.
Technical data
Transport and practical equipment
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the
cigarette on the glowing coil immediately.
– Put the cigarette lighter back in its socket.
Emergencies
– Press the cigarette lighter knob ››› Fig. 152.
– Wait for the lighter to spring out.
Fig. 151 Rear seats armrest: drink holder
Use the detachable parts
A
and
B
››› Fig. 151 to change the size of the holes.
– Remove part A or B in the direction indi-
cated by the arrow and replace in the required position in the drink holder.
● Take care when using the cigarette lighter!
Carelessness or negligence when using the
cigarette lighter can cause burns and serious
injuries.
Safety
WARNING
Two drinks can be placed in the drink holder.
● The cigarette lighter also works when the
ignition is off and when the ignition key is re133
Operation
Ashtrays*
WARNING
Never put flammable materials in the ashtray.
Risk of fire!
CAUTION
Never hold onto the ashtray by the lid when
removing it. Risk of breaking the lid.
12V Power socket
Additional information ››› page 192, Accessories and modifications to the vehicle.
WARNING
● Improper use of the sockets or electrical
appliances can cause a fire and lead to burns
and other serious injuries.
● Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. The 12 V power socket is also functional when the ignition is switched off and
the key is removed.
● Should the connected appliance overheat,
immediately switch it off and disconnect it
from the socket.
CAUTION
● The 12 V power socket can only be used to
power appliances with a power rating of up to
120 watts.
Fig. 153 Centre console: front ashtray/rear
ashtray.
Removing the ashtray
– Pull the ashtray ››› Fig. 153 upwards to re-
move.
Fig. 154 Centre console: 12 V power socket.
The 12 V power socket is located at the front
of the centre console ››› Fig. 154.
Using the power socket
– Open the cover or remove the cigarette
Inserting the ashtray
– Push the ashtray down.
lighter concealing the socket.
– Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
into the socket.
134
● Never exceed the maximum permitted power, as this could cause damage to the vehicle
electrical installation.
● With the engine switched off, however, the
vehicle battery will drain. Risk of discharging
the battery!
● Only use suitable plugs so as not to damage the power socket.
● Only use appliances that have been tested
for electromagnetic compatibility in compliance with current regulations.
● Before switching the ignition on or off, unplug the appliances from the power socket to
Storage compartment for glasses*
Coat hooks*
The coat hooks are located on the B-pillars
and on the handles on the interior lining
above each rear door.
● Follow the instructions for use of connected
appliances!
WARNING
Multimedia compartment
ing from the coat hooks do not obstruct your
view to the rear.
● Only use the coat hooks for light items of
– Press the compartment lid and it will drop
down ››› Fig. 156.
Fig. 155 Front centre console: multimedia
compartment.
The multimedia compartment is in the storage compartment of the front centre console
››› Fig. 155.
The compartment can be used to hold mobile
phones, mp3 players or similar devices.
WARNING
Never use the multimedia compartment as an
ashtray or to store flammable materials. Risk
of fire!
WARNING
This compartment must only remain open
when removing or replacing glasses.
CAUTION
● Do not place heat-sensitive objects in the
compartment as they could be damaged.
clothing and make sure that there are no
heavy or sharp objects in the pockets.
● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the
clothing, as this could interfere with the function of the head-protection airbags.
CAUTION
The side hooks support a maximum load of 2
kg.
Operation
partment for eyeglasses.
Emergencies
Fig. 156 Close-up of roof panel: storage com-
Advice
● Make sure that any items of clothing hang-
● The side compartment supports a maximum load of 0.25 kg.
Safety
protect them from any damage caused by
fluctuations in voltage.
Technical data
Transport and practical equipment
135
Operation
Front seat backrest net pockets
Compartments in the centre console
There is a bottle carrier in part B ››› Fig. 159
of the storage compartment in the front door.
WARNING
Only use part A ››› Fig. 159 of the compartment in the front door to store objects that do
not protrude from it so as not obstruct the deployment area of the side airbags.
Fig. 157 Front seats backrests: net pockets.
Fig. 158 Centre console: storage compart-
Storage compartment in the luggage
compartment*
ment
There are net pockets on the inside part of
the front seats backrests ››› Fig. 157.
These pockets are designed to hold lightweight objects such as a mobile phone or an
mp3 player.
Open storage compartment in centre console
››› Fig. 158.
Storage compartment in front door
WARNING
● Do not exceed the maximum load that the
net pockets can support. Heavy objects cannot be safely secured. Risk of injuries!
Fig. 160 Luggage compartment: storage com-
partment
CAUTION
The lid from the side storage compartment
can be removed to increase the size of the
boot.
● The net pockets support a maximum load of
150 g.
● Do not place overly large objects in the
pockets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp
edges. Risk of damage to the pockets.
136
– Hold onto the top of the lid and pull it out
Fig. 159 Storage compartment in door trim.
in the direction indicated by the arrow
››› Fig. 160.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be
safely secured in the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth
could impair the driving safety or driving
characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
– Distribute the load evenly in the luggage
compartment.
– Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-
ble in the luggage compartment.
– Place the heavy objects first.
– Secure heavy objects to the fastening rings
››› page 137.
WARNING
● Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could cause serious injuries.
jects.
● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,
loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring
vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of injury will be further increased
if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag. If this happens, objects may shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury.
● Please note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust
your speed and driving style accordingly, to
avoid accidents.
● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or
allowed maximum weight. If said weights are
exceeded, the driving characteristics of the
vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-
cially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
● Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and
rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before
you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
no adults or children in the vehicle.
fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
through ventilation slits in the side trim of
the luggage compartment. Ensure that the
ventilation slots are never covered.
● Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially available.
Fastening rings*
There can be four fastening rings in the luggage compartment for fastening luggage and
other objects.
– Always use suitable and undamaged straps
to secure luggage and other objects to the
fastening rings ››› in Loading the luggage compartment on page 137.
– Pull up the fastening rings to attach the
straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small
and light objects can build up so much energy that they can cause very severe injuries.
The amount of kinetic “energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
the object. The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Advice
compartment or the boot trim when using the
compartment.
● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-
Operation
● Make sure you do not damage the storage
Note
● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce
Emergencies
small objects with a total weight of 1.5 kg.
● Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on the fastening
rings.
Safety
CAUTION
● The compartments are designed to hold
Technical data
Transport and practical equipment
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying
unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this »
137
Operation
object generates a force corresponding to 20
times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the object increases to approximately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of
the injuries which might be sustained if this
“object” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the interior of the vehicle. This increased risk of injury will be further increased
if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
● If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries
could result in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
● Never secure a child seat on the fastening
rings.
During an accident, even small and light objects can have so much kinetic energy that
they can cause very severe injuries. The
amount of kinetic energy depends on the
speed of the vehicle and the weight of the
object. However, the speed of the vehicle is
the most important factor.
Example: An unsecured object weighing 4.5
kg produces energy corresponding to 20
times its weight in a frontal collision at 50
km/h (31 mph). This means that its weight
reaches around 90 kg. You can imagine the
severity of the injuries that might be sustained if this “projectile” strikes an occupant
as it flies through the vehicle interior.
WARNING
● Store objects in the luggage compartment
and secure to the fastening points.
● In an accident or sudden manoeuvre, loose
Luggage compartment
Introduction
Please observe the following points to ensure
the vehicle handles well at all times:
– Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward in the
luggage compartment as possible.
– Secure luggage using the fastening rings or
retaining net ››› page 139.
138
objects in the interior can be flung forward
and possibly injure vehicle occupants or others. This risk is even greater if the flying objects hit a triggering airbag. In this case, any
rebounding objects could injure vehicle occupants. Risk of fatal injuries!
● Take into account that transporting heavy
objects changes the centre of gravity that
could also cause changes in vehicle handling.
Risk of accident! Therefore, always adjust
your speed and driving style to suit these circumstances.
● Securing the load to the rings using unsuitable or damaged straps could lead to injuries
in the event of an accident or sudden braking
manoeuvre. Secure suitable straps safely to
the rings to ensure this does not happen.
● Position the load so it cannot move forward
during a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk of
injuries!
● If transporting sharp or dangerous objects
in the space provided when the rear seats are
folded, ensure the safety of the occupant of
the remaining rear seat ››› page 58.
● If the rear seat located alongside a folded
seat is occupied, ensure safety, for example,
by placing the load so that it stops the seat
from folding backward in the event of being
hit from behind.
● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the
interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
● Never exceed the allowed axle loads or al-
lowed maximum weight. Risk of accident!
● Never transport passengers in the luggage
compartment!
CAUTION
Make sure sharp objects stored in the boot
cannot not damage the rear window heating
filaments.
Transport and practical equipment
Category N1 vehicles
Category N1 vehicles with no protection grille
must use a retaining set compliant with
Standard EN 12195 (1 – 4) to secure the
load.
Retaining nets*
Technical data
Tyre pressure must be adapted to suit the
load ››› page 216, Useful life of tyres.
CAUTION
The rings support a maximum load of 3.5 kN
(350 kg).
Note
The front ring B is below the folding backrest of the rear seats ››› Fig. 161.
Advice
Note
Hook*
Fig. 163 Retaining nets.
Emergencies
Operation
Retaining elements*
Fig. 162 Luggage compartment: hook.
ements.
The following retaining elements are fitted in
the boot ››› Fig. 161:
A
Rings to secure the load and the retaining nets.
B
Rings used solely for the retaining nets.
CAUTION
The side hooks support a maximum load of
7.5 kg.
Fig. 164 Retaining nets.
Example of securing retaining nets
››› Fig. 163 and ››› Fig. 164.
A
Sideways bag
B
Ground net
C
Lengthways bag
Safety
Fig. 161 Luggage compartment: retaining el-
There are hooks on both sides of the boot to
secure light items of luggage such as bags,
etc. ››› Fig. 162.
»
139
Operation
WARNING
WARNING
Do not place objects on the rear shelf that
could endanger the vehicle occupants in case
of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident.
Do not exceed the maximum load that the
nets can support. Heavy objects cannot be
safely secured. Risk of injury!
CAUTION
CAUTION
● The retaining nets support a maximum load
● The rear shelf supports a maximum load of
of 1.5 kg.
● Do not place any item with sharp edges in
the net. Risk of damaging the net!
Rear shelf
1 kg.
Fig. 166 Remove the shelf.
The shelf can be removed if a large load is to
be transported.
››› Fig. 166 must be
securely in place in the trim supports 2 .
– The shelf supports 3
Removing the shelf
– Remove the straps from the shelf 1
– The size of the load must not exceed the
– Remove the shelf from its housing 2 by
– When open, the shelf must not be bent
››› Fig. 165.
height of the shelf.
knocking it gently from underneath between the supports.
Fitting the shelf
– Place the shelf on the side supports on the
Fig. 165 Remove the shelf.
trim.
– Adjust the shelf supports 3
fit the supports
2
››› Fig. 166 to
in the trim.
– Fit into place by knocking the top of the
shelf gently between the supports.
– Attach the straps 1 to the tray.
140
● If handled incorrectly, the tray could bend
on closing the rear lid and become damaged
or damage the trim. Follow the instructions
below:
against the shelf seal.
– There must be no objects in the space be-
tween the open shelf and the backrest of
the rear seat.
Note
The shelf will lift when the rear lid is opened.
Transport and practical equipment
WARNING
● The load on the roof carrier must be properly secured. Risk of accident!
● Always secure the load using retaining
straps that are in good condition.
● Distribute the load evenly.
Attachment points
Technical data
Introduction
● Remember that the rear lid must not hit the
roof load.
● The total height of the vehicle increases ac-
cording to the roof load. Compare the height
of the vehicle with the heights of bridges or
other underpasses, for example, the height
of the garage door.
● Do not forget to remove the roof carrier before entering an automatic carwash.
Advice
Roof rack*
● Take into account that the load must not
damage the aerial located on the roof.
● When transporting heavy or large objects
For the sake of the environment
If aerodynamic resistance increases, fuel consumption will also increase.
Operation
on the roof, any change in normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or increased wind resistance must be taken
into account. Risk of accident! For this reason, speed and driving style must be adjusted for the situation.
● Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking.
Emergencies
● Adjust your driving style to suit visibility,
the weather and road and traffic conditions.
lowed maximum weight. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
● Only use SEAT-authorised roof carriers.
● Where roof carriers from other systems are
used or where they are not fitted properly,
any damage caused to the vehicle will not be
covered by the warranty. Therefore, carefully
follow the Instruction Manual for installation
of the roof carrier.
Fig. 167 Basic roof carrier attachment points.
Location of the basic roof carrier attachment
points ››› Fig. 167:
A
Rear attachment points
B
Front attachment points
Install and remove following the instructions
given.
Safety
● Never exceed the allowed axle loads or al-
»
141
Operation
CAUTION
Follow the instructions given in the manual.
Roof load
Air conditioning
Heating and air conditioning
General notes
The maximum permissible roof load (including the support system) of 75 kg and the total authorised weight of the vehicle must not
be exceeded.
The power of the heating depends on the
temperature of the coolant. Therefore, maximum power is only obtained when the engine has reached operating temperature.
It will not be possible to carry the full maximum load if the roof carrier you are using is
rated for a load which is less than this figure.
In this case, you can only load the roof carrier
to the maximum load permitted in your installation manual.
The temperature and humidity of the air inside the vehicle decrease when the cooling
system is turned on. This therefore increases
the comfort of all vehicle occupants when
outside temperatures and humidity are high.
It also helps prevent the windows from misting over during cold periods of the year.
The air recirculation system can be switched
on temporarily to increase the cooling effect.
Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen clear of ice, snow or leaves to ensure
unimpaired heating and cooling.
When the air conditioning is on, condensation can drip from the evaporator in the air
cooling system and form a pool underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak!
WARNING
● All windows must be clear of ice, snow and
condensation for driving safety. Therefore,
142
make sure you familiarise yourself with the
correct use of heating and ventilation, window demisting and defrosting and cooling.
● Never use the air recirculation system for
too long, as it prevents fresh air from entering the vehicle and used air can cause tiredness, reduce your attention span and cause
the windows to mist over. This increases the
risk of an accident. Switch off the air recirculation system as soon as the windows begin
to mist over.
WARNING
Do not switch off Climatronic for longer than
necessary.
● Switch Climatronic back on as soon as the
windows begin to mist over.
Note
● Used air escapes through ventilation slots
in the rear of the luggage compartment.
● Smoking is not recommended while the air
recirculation system is in use, as the smoke
drawn from the interior of the vehicle settles
in the evaporator of the air conditioning system. This causes a persistent, unpleasant
smell while the system is running that is
time-consuming and expensive (evaporator
replacement) to eliminate.
● To guarantee proper operation, never cover
the air outlets in the luggage compartment.
If the interior temperature can be reached
without switching on the air conditioning, the
fresh air mode should be used.
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
compressor consumes engine power and has
influence on fuel consumption.
For the sake of the environment
Saving fuel reduces emissions.
If the vehicle interior has overheated due to
excessive solar radiation, it is best to open
the windows or doors to allow the hot air to
escape.
Faults
If the air conditioning does not work at outside temperatures above +5°C (+41°F) then
● The air conditioning compressor has
switched off temporarily because of increased engine coolant temperature
››› page 97.
If you cannot repair the fault yourself or
where cooling power continues to drop,
switch off the system. Contact a specialised
service.
Operation
While in motion, the air conditioning should
not be switched on if the windows are open.
the system is faulty. This may be due to one
of the following reasons:
● One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse
and replace if necessary ››› page 80.
Advice
Economic use of the air-conditioning
system
Technical data
Air conditioning
Fig. 168 Air vents
Safety
Emergencies
Air vents
Opening air vents 3 and 4
– Turn the vertical circular control upwards.
»
143
Operation
Closing air vents 3 and 4
Heating and fresh air
– Turn the vertical circular control down-
wards.
Operation
changing the position of the sliding adjuster upwards or downwards ››› Fig. 168.
All controls, except control B ››› Fig. 169,
can be set to any intermediate position.
– The air circulation direction can be varied
Leave the blower activated at all times to prevent the windows from misting over.
by changing the position of the sliding adjuster to the right or to the left.
Note
Fig. 169 Heating: controls.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 38
Temperature selection
››› Fig. 169 clockwise
to increase the temperature.
– Turn rotary control A
– Turn rotary control A anti-clockwise to re-
duce the temperature.
Blower selection
››› Fig. 169 to position 1 to 4 to switch the blower on.
– Turn rotary control B
– Turn rotary control B to position 0 to
switch the blower off.
144
Air distribution selection
– Turn rotary control C
– The air circulation height can be varied by
Depending on the position of the adjusters
and on the weather, open vents can provide
air which is either heated, unheated or
cooled.

››› Fig. 169 to select
the air vents ››› page 143, Air vents you
wish to activate.
Changing the direction of air delivery from
air vents 3 and 4
The flow of air from the vents is controlled using control C ››› Fig. 169. Vents 3 ››› Fig. 168
and 4 can be opened and closed individually.
››› in Air recirculation
on page 145 to close the fresh air vent.
– Press button 1
If the system is set so that all of the air is
used to defrost the windows, no air is supplied to the footwell area. This could limit
heating comfort.
Air recirculation

Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
If the rotary switch C ››› Fig. 169 is in the
thaw position, the recirculation flap will always be open (button light off).
If the rotary switch C is switched from any
position to the thaw position, recirculation
will be automatically deactivated.
Air conditioning
››› Fig. 169, the switch's
lamp will light up, indicating that air recirculation inside the vehicle has been activated.
Disconnecting the recirculation
In any position of rotary switch
thaw:
C
except
● Press button 1 again and the button's
lamp will go off, indicating that air recirculation from the outside has been activated.
In the thaw position of rotary switch C , the
entry of air into the vehicle interior is always
from the outside.
Note
A visit to the specialised service once a year
is recommended to clean the air conditioning
system.
Manual operation
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ›››
General notes on page 142.
When the cooling system is on and under certain conditions, air can be blown from the
vents at a temperature of approximately +5°C
(+41°F). In the event of prolonged, irregular
distribution of the air flow from the outlets
and significant differences in temperature,
e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive people
may catch cold.
Temperature selection
››› Fig. 170 clockwise
to increase the temperature.
– Turn rotary control A
– Turn rotary control A anti-clockwise to re-
duce the temperature.
Blower selection
››› Fig. 170 to position 1 to 4 to switch the blower on.
– Turn rotary control B
– Turn rotary control B to position 0 to
switch the blower off.
››› page 146, Air recirculation to close the fresh air vent.
– Press button  1
Air distribution selection
››› Fig. 170 to select
the air vents ››› page 143 you wish to activate.
– Turn rotary control C
in
Switching cooling on and off
Air conditioning (manual)*
››› Fig. 170 and
the lamp in the button will illuminate.
– Press the button A/C 2
General notes
The air cooling system only works if A/C button 2 ››› Fig. 170 ››› page 145 is pressed
and under following conditions:
● The engine is running,
Technical data
● The blower control is in position 1–4.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 37
Advice
● The outside temperature is above +2°C
(+36°F),
except
Operation
● Press button 1
C
Emergencies
In any position of rotary switch
thaw:
– Press the A/C 2 button again and the
light in the button will switch off.
»
Safety
Connecting the recirculation
Fig. 170 Air conditioning: controls.
145
Operation
Coldest setting
ble once all of the conditions are met
– On turning control A to the coldest setting
(blue indicator), buttons
A/C , light up
1

and
››› page 145, General notes.
2
– The recirculation function is activated auto-
matically in order to cool faster.
Note
● If the air distribution is directed towards
the windows, all, of the heating power is
used to defrost the windscreen. No warm air
is directed to the footwell area. This could
limit heating comfort.
● The AC button lamp will illuminate after
the system has been switched on, even if not
all of the conditions for cooling system operations are met. Cooling is indicated as availa-
146
Disconnecting the recirculation
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
If the rotary switch C ››› Fig. 170 is in the
thaw position, the recirculation flap will always be open (button light off).
If the rotary switch C is switched from any
position to the thaw position, recirculation
will be automatically deactivated.
Connecting the recirculation
In any position of rotary switch
thaw:
● Press button 1 ››› Fig. 170, the switch's
lamp will light up, indicating that air recirculation inside the vehicle has been activated.
C
except
In any position of rotary switch
thaw:
C
except
● Press button 1 again and the button's
lamp will go off, indicating that air recirculation from the outside has been activated.
In the thaw position of rotary switch C , the
entry of air into the vehicle interior is always
from the outside.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ›››
General notes on page 142.
in
Air conditioning
Technical data
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning)
Operation
Advice
General notes
Climatronic automatically maintains a comfortable temperature. To do so, it automatically regulates the supplied air temperature
and the blower and air distribution levels.
The system also allows for the effect of sunlight, so there is no need for manual adjustment. It also has a humidity sensor that
helps to automatically demist the windscreen.
Automatic operations ››› page 148 guarantee maximum comfort any time of year.
Climatronic description
Switching off the Climatronic
Cooling only works if the following conditions
are met:
● Turn control 10 to the left until the segments of column 9 ››› Fig. 171 switch off.
● The engine is running
● After 1 second has elapsed, turn the control
● the outside temperature is above +2°C
again to switch off the display.
(+36°F);
In order to ensure engines subject to heavy
loads are cooled, the air conditioning compressor is switched off in the event of high
coolant temperatures.
● A/C
18
››› Fig. 171 switched on.
Starting the Climatronic
The corresponding function will be switched
on when a button is pressed, turning on the
air conditioning if it was switched off, with
the exception of button 17 ››› Fig. 171 (recirculation).
Safety
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 36
Emergencies
Fig. 171 Climatronic: controls.
Recommended setting for all seasons of the
year
● Set the required temperature. We recom-
mend +22°C (72°F).
»
147
Operation
● Press the AUTO button
13
››› Fig. 171.
● Adjust vents 3 and 4 ››› page 143 so that
the air flow is directed slightly upwards.
Change between degrees Centigrade and degrees Fahrenheit
Keep the AUTO and A/C ››› Fig. 171 buttons
held down for 2 seconds at the same time.
The data is displayed on the screen in the
units required.
››› Fig. 171 and
Automatic mode is switched off by pressing
the air distribution buttons or increasing or
decreasing the blower speed. However, the
temperature remains regulated.
year is recommended to clean the Climatronic
system.
11
››› Fig. 171 is at the bottom. Do not cover it
with stickers or the like, as this could have a
negative effect on Climatronic operations.
Automatic mode
Automatic mode is used to maintain a constant temperature and demist the windows
inside the vehicle.
Switching on automatic mode
● Set the interior temperature between +16°C
(+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F).
● Adjust vents 3 ››› page 143 and 4 so that
the air flow is directed slightly upwards.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
Switching on air recirculation mode
17 ››› Fig. 171 and the 
symbol is displayed on the screen.
● Press button 
Adjusting the temperature
● When you switch on the ignition, control 1
● A visit to the specialised service once a
148
13
››› Fig. 171 can be used to set the required in-
Note
● The interior temperature sensor
● Press the AUTO button
AUTO displayed on the screen.
terior temperature.
It is possible to select interior temperatures
from +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In this
range the temperature is regulated automatically. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is
selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a
temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selected,
“HI” is displayed on the screen. At both extremes, Climatronic works at maximum cooling or heating power, respectively. The temperature is not regulated.
In the event of prolonged, irregular distribution of the air flow from the outlets (particularly the footwells) and significant differences in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive people may catch cold.
Switching off air recirculation mode
17 ››› Fig. 171 and the 
symbol disappears from the screen.
● Press button 
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ›››
General notes on page 142.
in
Note
If air recirculation mode remains on for 15 minutes, the  symbol will start to flash on
the screen to indicate prolonged air recirculation. If air recirculation is not switched off,
the symbol will continue to flash for about 5
minutes.
Blower selection
Climatronic automatically regulates blower
speed according to the interior temperature.
Driving
Climatronic will switch off when the blower
switches off.
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 18
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ›››
General notes on page 142.
in
WARNING
● When moving with the engine switched off,
Windscreen defrost
Switching on windscreen defrosting
● Press the button 
12
››› Fig. 171.
Switching off windscreen defrosting
● Press button 
times or press the
12
AUTO
››› Fig. 171 several
button.
The temperature is regulated automatically.
The air output is increased from vents 1
››› page 143 and 2.
the ignition key must always remain in position 2 ››› Fig. 172 ››› page 151 (ignition on).
The control lamps will light up in this position. Otherwise, the steering lock could engage suddenly. Risk of accident!
● Do not remove the key from the ignition un-
cle has come to a complete stop. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
● Turning the steering wheel fully in either
direction when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is in gear puts the power steering
under great stress. This could lead to noise.
Never leave the steering wheel turned fully in
either direction for more than 15 seconds.
Risk of damage to the power steering system!
● The starter motor may only be used (key
position 3 ››› Fig. 172 ››› page 151 in the ignition) if the engine is off. Using the starter
motor when the engine is running could damage it.
til the vehicle has come to a standstill and is
secure (e.g. the handbrake is engaged). Otherwise, the steering lock could suddenly engage. Risk of accident!
● Immediately release the ignition key when
the engine starts, otherwise damage could be
caused to the starter motor.
● Always take the ignition key with you when
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
and over-loading the engine before it reaches
operating temperature. Risk of engine damage!
you leave the vehicle. This is particularly important if you leave children in the vehicle.
Children could, for example, start the engine
with the subsequent risk of accident.
● Never leave the engine running in unventi-
lated or closed rooms. The exhaust gases
contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and
colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents! Carbon monoxide can cause people to
lose consciousness and can cause death.
Technical data
● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-
Advice
Starting and stopping the engine
Operation
10 ››› Fig. 171 counter-clockwise (to lower the speed) or clockwise (to increase the speed).
● Turn control
● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the
engine is running.
Emergencies
Driving
● When the engine is cold, you should avoid
● Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of engine
damage! In vehicles with a catalytic converter, fuel that has not been burned could reach
the catalytic converter and catch fire in it.
This would lead to a fault in the catalytic converter. You may use the battery from another
Safety
It is possible, however, to set the blower
speed to suit requirements.
»
149
Operation
vehicle to help you start your engine
›››  page 51.
● After prolonged and demanding operation
of the engine, when the journey has ended,
do not stop the engine immediately. Let the
engine run at idle for about one more minute.
This will stop the engine from overheating.
Power steering
The power steering allows you to turn the
steering wheel more easily.
If the power steering fails or the engine is off
(towing), it is still possible to turn the vehicle's steering wheel fully. However, you need
more strength to steer the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary. If possible, move off immediately after starting the engine. This will help the
engine reach operating temperature more
quickly, reducing the quantity of emissions.
Note
● The engine can only be started with the
original SEAT key.
● Loud running noises may be heard briefly
after cold-starting the engine. This is normal
and is no cause for concern.
● After the engine has been stopped and the
ignition switched off, the radiator fan may
continue running for around 10 minutes.
● If the engine still does not start after a sec-
ond attempt, the fuel pump fuse might have
blown. Check it and replace if necessary
››› page 80 or contact your Specialised Service.
● You should always engage the steering lock
when you exit the vehicle. This will hinder
any attempts at theft.
150
Driver warning lamps and messages
 (in red) Faulty steering! To
park the vehicle
If the warning lamp remains on and the driver
indication appears, the power steering could
be faulty.
Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
 (in yellow) Steering: System
fault! You may continue driving.
If the warning lamp comes on, the steering
could react with more difficultly or more sensitivity than normal. In addition, when driving
in a straight line the steering wheel may be
off-centre.
Drive slowly to a specialised workshop and
have the fault repaired.
 (in yellow) Steering lock:
fault! Go to an Official Service
The electronic steering lock is malfunctioning.
Go to a specialised workshop as soon as
possible and have the fault repaired.
WARNING
Take it immediately to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired: risk of accident!
Note
If the lamp  (in red) or else  (in yellow)
lights up briefly, you may continue driving.
Start-up lock security system (immobiliser)
There is an electronic chip in the key. The
electronic immobiliser is deactivated when
the key is inserted into the ignition. The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated
when the key is removed from the ignition.
The engine will not start if an unauthorised
key is used.
The informative display indicates:
Immobiliser active!
Driving
If the steering lock is engaged and it is difficult or impossible to turn the key to position
2 , release the lock by turning the steering
wheel slightly in both directions.
Technical data
Ignition lock
Fig. 174 Emergency ignition in vehicles with
Keyless Access.
Fig. 172 Ignition key positions.
– Starting
Diesel engines
1 – Fuel supply stopped, ignition switched
off, engine stopped, steering can be locked
2
– Engine pre-heating, ignition switched
on
3
– Starting
To engage the Steering lock without the key
in the ignition, turn the steering wheel slightly until you hear it engage.
Fig. 173 In the steering column: start-up
push button for the Keyless Access lock and
start-up system. The layout in right-hand
drive vehicles is symmetrical.
Switching the ignition on/off
Emergencies
– Ignition switched on
3
Opening the driver's door when exiting the
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the
steering column if the ignition is disabled.
● Briefly push the start-up button ››› Fig. 173
without touching the brake or clutch pedal ››› .
Emergency starting function
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
an emergency start-up will be required. The
relevant message will appear in the dash
panel display. This may happen when, for example, the vehicle key battery is very low or
flat:
Safety
1 – Ignition switched off, engine stopped,
steering can be locked
Operation
The start-up button may only be used if there
is a valid key in the vehicle.
Petrol engines
2
Advice
Starter button
»
151
Operation
● Immediately after pushing the start-up button, keep the vehicle key next to the steering
column ››› Fig. 174.
● The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
Emergency disconnection
If the engine does not stop after briefly pressing the start-up button, an emergency disconnect will be required:
● Press the starter button twice within 1 sec-
ond or press it once for more than 2 seconds
››› .
● The engine turns off automatically.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or without due care, this may cause accidents and
serious injury.
● Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthorised person could lock the vehicle, start the
engine or connect the ignition and, in this
way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the
windows).
Note
In diesel vehicles with the Keyless Access
system, there may be a delay in the engine
starting if it requires preheating.
After this interval, it will not be possible to
start the engine without a valid key inside
the vehicle.
WARNING
Any accidental movement of the vehicle could
result in serious injury.
● When pressing the start-up button, do not
press the brake or clutch pedal, this way the
engine will start immediately.
152
● Release the ignition key as soon as the en-
gine starts. The key returns to position
2
.
● If the engine does not start after 10 sec-
onds, turn the key back to position
peat the action after 30 seconds.
1
. Re-
● Release the handbrake before moving off.
Switching off the engine with the key
Stop the engine by turning the ignition key to
position 1 ››› Fig. 172 ››› page 151.
Engine restart feature
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle
after the engine stops, you will only have 5
seconds to restart it. A warning will display
on the dash panel screen.
● Press the clutch pedal all the way down
and start the engine 3 ››› Fig. 172
››› page 151, without pressing the accelerator. Keep the clutch pedal pressed down until
the engine starts.
Starting the engine
Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped
with a glow plug system. When you switch on
the ignition, the glow plug warning lamp 
will light up. The engine can be started
straight away when the lamp switches off.
Do not connect electrical appliances during
preheating so as not the drain the vehicle
battery unnecessarily.
Starting the engine
● Move the gearbox lever into neutral or
move the selector lever to position P or N and
pull firmly on the handbrake.
Brakes and brake servo systems
Introduction
WARNING
● The brake servo only works when the en-
gine is running. Braking when the engine is
switched off requires applying more strength
to the brake pedal. Risk of accident!
● Press down on the clutch pedal when stop-
ping and braking with a manual gearbox,
● Always fully release the handbrake. If it is
only partially released, this will cause overheating of the rear brakes, which can impair
the function of the brake system. Risk of accident!
● Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. They could release the handbrake or
move the gear lever. The vehicle could start
moving. Risk of accident!
● Insufficient fuel can cause the engine to run
irregularly or to switch off. Brake assist systems could be impaired. Risk of accident!
● Always adjust your driving style to suit visi-
bility, the weather and road and traffic conditions. The best vehicle safety offered by
brake assist systems must never encourage
you to run greater risks. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
● Observe the information concerning new
brake pads ››› page 161.
● Where braking is not necessary, do not
wear down the brake pads by pressing down
Note
● If you brake suddenly and the brake system
control unit regards the situation as hazardous for the drivers behind you, the brake
lights will begin to flash automatically. After
reducing speed to approximately 10 km/h (6
mph) or stopping the vehicle, the brake lights
will stop flashing and the hazard warning
lights will switch on. The hazard warning
lights are automatically switched off when
you accelerate or restart the vehicle.
● On long, steep gradients, reduce your
Control lamp
The warning lamp  illuminates if the brake
fluid level is too low or if there is a fault in the
ABS system.
The informative display indicates:
Brake fluid Instruction Manual!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
check the level of the brake fluid
››› page 209
WARNING
● The following indications must be taken in-
speed and change to a lower gear (manual
gearbox) or move the selector lever to a lower
gear position (automatic gearbox). This uses
the force of the engine and the brakes do not
suffer as much. If you still have to brake, do
so intermittently, pressing down repeatedly
on the brake pedal.
to account when opening the engine compartment to check the brake fluid
››› page 202, Engine compartment.
● Vehicle modifications (e.g. to the engine,
lock brake system (ABS) can lead to longer
braking distances – Risk of accident!
brakes, frame or a combination of wheels and
tyres) could impair the brake assist systems
››› page 192, Accessories and modifications
to the vehicle.
Advice
● To ensure the brake assist systems work
properly, all wheels must be fitted with tyres
approved by the manufacturer.
front spoiler or where a different front spoiler, wheel trims, etc. are subsequently fitted,
make sure the air vent to the brakes on the
front wheels is not blocked. Otherwise, braking operations may be impaired. Risk of accident!
Operation
● In the event of damage to the standard
matically. A fault in the ABS is indicated by
the  ››› page 155 warning lamp.
● If the warning lamp  illuminates together
with the warning lamp  ››› page 155,  ,
stop the vehicle! Go to a technical service.
Emergencies
gently on the brake pedal. This causes the
brakes to overheat, increasing their wear and
increasing braking distances.
● A fault in the brake system or in the Anti-
Safety
petrol engine vehicle at low speed. Otherwise, the brake servo might not work properly. Risk of accident!
Technical data
Driving
● In the event of a fault in the ABS system,
the ESC, TCS and EDL are switched off auto-
153
Operation
Brakes
Wear
The rate of wear of the brake pads depends
on the driving style and on the way in which
the vehicle is used. The brake pads will wear
more quickly if you use your vehicle frequently in urban traffic and short trips or drive in a
sporty style. Under these demanding conditions, visit your specialised service, even before the scheduled service date, so that the
thickness of the brake pads can be measured.
Wet roads or road salt
If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have been gritted with
salt, braking power may set in later than normal. Dry the brakes as soon as possible by
braking repeatedly.
in the brake system. Visit a specialised service immediately and adjust your driving style
to the extent of the damage and to limit the
effect of the brakes.
Releasing the handbrake
Low brake fluid level
– Keep the button pressed down and push
Insufficient brake fluid could cause faults in
the brake system. The brake fluid level is controlled electronically ››› page 153, Control
lamp.
Brake servo
The brake servo supplements the pressure
you exert on the brake pedal. The brake servo
only works when the engine is running.
154
the lever all the way down.
Control lamp
The warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied with the ignition on .
Additionally, driving the vehicle at speeds exceeding 6 km/h (4 mph) for at least 3 seconds produces an audible warning.
The informative display indicates:
Release the handbrake!
Braking and stability systems
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Long periods of inactivity and little use can
lead to rust on the brake discs and dirt on the
brake pads. Where the brake system is subjected to light stress or in the case of corrosion, clean the brake discs by braking fully
several times at a high speed.
If you notice that the braking distance suddenly increases and the brake pedal can be
pressed down more fully, there may be a fault
press the unlock button at the same time
››› Fig. 175.
Handbrake
Corrosion
Brake system fault
– Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and
The ESC system increases control of the vehicle in emergency situations, e.g. during a
sudden change in direction. Depending on
the driving conditions, it reduces the risk of
skidding and increases driving stability.
Fig. 175 Centre console: handbrake.
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up all the way.
The system uses the steering wheel angle
and road speed to calculate the changes of
direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them with the actual behaviour
of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for
Driving
● Electronic differential lock (EDL),
● Hydraulic brake assist system (HBA),
● Hill hold control (HHC).
The ASR should be switched on at all times.
Only under certain circumstances should the
system be switched off, e.g.
● driving with chains,
● driving in deep snow or on very soft surfa-
ces,
● During the “swinging movement” required
to remove a stuck vehicle
Switch the ASR back on as soon as possible.
Brake assist system (HBA)*
The HBA system is activated when you press
down on the brake pedal suddenly. It increases braking power, helping to reduce braking
distances. To reduce braking distance as
much as possible, keep the brake pedal
Technical data
If the  warning lamp is illuminated there is
a fault in the ESC.
The informative display indicates:
Hill hold control (HHC)*
The HHC system makes it easier to start the
vehicle on hills. The system maintains the
brake pressure created by pressing down on
the brake pedal for 2 seconds after it has
been released. Your foot can be removed
from the brake pedal and you can use the accelerator pedal and move away on a hill without having to use the handbrake. The brake
pressure drops as the accelerator pedal is
pressed. If the vehicle cannot be started, it
will start to move backwards after 2 seconds.
The HHC is activated on gradients of over
5%, if the driver door is closed. It only works
for starting on hills, moving both forward and
in reverse. It is not activated during start-up
down hill.
Control lamp
Report No.: electronic stability
control (ESC)
Advice
● Traction control system (TCS),
The brake assist function is deactivated automatically when the brake pedal is released.
or
Report No.: Traction control
system (ASR)
Operation
The stability (ESC) system includes the following systems:
● Anti-lock brake system (ABS),
With the help of this system, the ABS is activated more quickly and more efficiently.
and turn it on again. Upon switching on the
ignition again, if the warning lamp has
switched off, this means the ESC is functioning correctly again.
Go to a technical service.
Note
If the battery is disconnected and connected
again, the yellow warning lamp  lights up
when the ignition is switched on. This warning lamp must switch off after covering a
short distance.
Emergencies
The  warning lamp on the general instrument panel starts flashing when the system
is working.
pressed down firmly until the vehicle comes
to a standstill.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
If the control lamp  flashes, the ESC is
working.
The ABS system prevents the wheels locking
during braking. This helps the driver keep
control of the vehicle.
If the  warning lamp illuminates on ignition, the ESC system may have switched off
due to technical reasons. Turn off the ignition
The driver is made aware of ABS assistance
by the pulsating of the brake pedal and a
characteristic noise.
Safety
example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the
ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automatically.
»
155
Operation
Keep the brake pedal pressed down while the
ABS is working. The ABS will switch off when
the brake pedal is released. Never brake intermittently while the ABS is working!
Control lamp
If the  warning lamp is illuminated, there is
a fault in the ABS.
The informative display indicates:
ABS fault
The brake system alone is operational in the
vehicle, without ABS.
Go to a technical service.
WARNING
● If the  warning lamp illuminates together
with the ››› page 153  warning lamp,  ,
stop the vehicle! Go to a technical service.
● A fault in the Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
If the  warning lamp illuminates on ignition, the TCS system may have switched off
due to technical reasons. Turn off the ignition
and turn it on again. Upon switching on the
ignition again, if the warning lamp has
switched off, this means the TCS is functioning correctly again.
Manual gearbox
Changing gears
If the  warning lamp remains illuminated,
there is a fault in the TCS.
The informative display indicates:
Report No.: Traction control
system (ASR)
Go to a technical service.
Fig. 176 Gear shift diagram of a 5- or 6-speed
manual gearbox
Read the additional information carefully
Electronic differential lock
can lead to longer braking distances – Risk of
accident!
If one of the wheels starts to skid, the EDL
brakes that wheel, transmitting the driving
force to the other wheels. This increases vehicle stability and improves driving stability.
Anti-slip regulation of the driving
wheels (ASR)*
To prevent the disc brake of the braking
wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out automatically if subjected to excessive loads.
The vehicle will continue to function normally
without EDL. The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
If the wheels start to slip, the TCS adapts the
engine speed to the driving conditions. Particularly in unfavourable conditions, the TCS
helps starting, accelerating and hill starts.
156
If the control lamp  flashes, the ASR is
working.
›››  page 34
When changing gear, always depress the
clutch pedal fully and keep it pressed down
to avoid excessive clutch wear.
In order to drive at an optimum RPM, follow
the gear change indications ›››  page 25.
Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped. On engaging reverse gear while the
engine is running, first wait a moment with
the clutch pedal pressed down fully to limit
gear shift noise.
The reverse lights switch on when the reverse
gear is selected and the ignition is on.
Driving
WARNING
Automatic gearbox
Basic information
The gearbox changes up and down automatically. The gearbox can be set to Tiptronic
mode. The gears can be changed manually in
this mode ››› page 159.
The engine can only be started in positions P
or N. If, on engaging the steering lock,
switching the ignition on/off or starting the
engine, the selector lever is not in these positions, the informative display will show Move
the selector lever to position
P/N!, or  P/N is shown on the general
dash panel display.
At temperatures below -10°C (14°F), the engine can only be started in position P.
Move the selector lever to position P when
parking the vehicle on a flat surface. On a
slope, the handbrake should be firmly ap-
● Never press the accelerator when selecting
the automatic gearbox operating mode when
the vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident!
● Never move the selector lever to positions
R or P when driving. Risk of accident!
● If the vehicle is to be stopped with a gear
selected and the engine idling (e.g. waiting
or moving slowly at traffic lights), press down
on the brake pedal because the transmission
is not entirely interrupted when the engine is
idling and the vehicle will tend to start moving.
● Apply the handbrake firmly and put the se-
lector lever in position P before opening the
bonnet and working on the vehicle with the
engine running. Risk of accident! Strictly follow the safety instructions ››› page 202, Engine compartment.
● When stopping on a slope (hill), try not to
stop the vehicle from moving by pressing the
“accelerator” with a gear selected. This could
overheat the clutch. If the clutch risks being
burnt due to this force, it would switch off
Technical data
● The drive wheels could lose traction on a
slippery road surface when the kick-down
function is activated. Risk of sliding!
Advice
If, while the vehicle is moving, the selector
lever is accidentally moved to position N, release the accelerator and wait for the engine
to idle before moving it back into position.
● If you have to stop on a hill, press down on
the brake pedal to stop the vehicle from moving.
CAUTION
● In DSG automatic gearboxes, the double
clutch is protected from overloads. If the hill
hold control is used, the clutches are subjected to greater force if the vehicle is at a
standstill on a slope or suddenly accelerating
on a slope.
Operation
Note
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while
driving. The pressure of your hand could lead
to premature wear of the gear system.
and the vehicle could move backwards. Risk
of accident!
● Should the clutches overheat, the  sym-
bol is shown on the informative display with
a warning message Gear overheated.
Stop! Instruction Manual! An audible
warning is also heard. Stop the vehicle in this
case, stop the engine and wait until the symbol  has switched off. Danger of damage to
the gearbox! You can continue driving once
the symbol is switched off.
Emergencies
Never engage reverse gear when moving forward. Risk of accident!
plied before moving the selector lever to the
park position. This reduces the load on the
lock mechanism while making it easier to
move the selector lever from position P.
Starting and driving
Safety
WARNING
Starting
– Press and hold the brake pedal.
– Press and hold the interlock button on the
selector lever knob and move the selector
»
157
Operation
lever to position ››› page 158 before releasing the interlock button.
– Release the brake and press the accelera-
shifts down and the vehicle accelerates. It
only shifts up after the maximum engine
speed has been reached.
tor.
Stopping
P
Selector lever positions
– The selector lever does not have to be
moved to position N if the vehicle is stopped for a short period, e.g. at intersections.
Applying the brake is enough. However, the
engine must remain idling.
If you want to move the selector lever from
this position, press the interlock button on
the selector lever knob while pressing down
on the brake pedal.
– Press the brake pedal.
If the battery is drained, the selector lever
cannot be moved from position P.
– Apply the handbrake.
tor lever to position P and release the button.
Fig. 177 Gear selector lever
– Reverse gear
To move the selector lever to position R from
positions P or N, press the interlock button
on the selector lever knob and press down on
the brake pedal.
The kick-down feature allows maximum acceleration to be reached.
158
R
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling.
Kick-down feature
In any gear programme, press down fully on
the accelerator for the automatic gearbox to
activate the kick-down feature. This function
takes priority over the gear programmes without taking into account the position of the selector lever (D, S or Tiptronic) and is used to
reach maximum acceleration, using full engine power. Depending on the road speed
and engine speed, the automatic gearbox
– Parking position
In this position, the driven wheels are mechanically locked.
The parking position can only be selected
when the vehicle is stationary.
Parking
– Press the interlock button, move the selec-
The current position of the selector lever is
shown on the general instrument panel display 1 ››› Fig. 178.
The reverse lights come on when the selector
lever is in position R and the ignition is on.
Fig. 178 Informative display: selector lever
positions.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 35
N
– Neutral (idling)
Neutral (idling) is engaged in this position.
To move the selector lever from position N (if
the lever has remained in this position for
Driving
– Drive (forwards)
On shifting up, the gear is only engaged
when there is no risk of engine damage.
S
– Sports driving position
Shifting up later than usual makes full use of
the engine power. This shifts down earlier in
relation to position D.
To move the selector lever to position S from
position D, press the interlock button on the
selector lever knob.
Advice
When the accelerator pedal is pressed down
to the kick-down zone, the gearbox will shift
down in line with the road speed and engine
speed.
Fig. 179 Selector lever: Tiptronic.
The Tiptronic gearbox allows the driver to
change gears manually using the selector
lever.
Activating the manual gearbox
– From position D, push the selector lever to
the right. The selected position of the selector lever is shown on the general instrument panel display together with the gear
engaged 1 ››› Fig. 178.
Shifting up
– Push the selector lever gently forwards +
››› Fig. 179.
Shifting down
– Push the selector lever gently backwards
-
››› Fig. 179.
Note
Operation
In some situations (e.g. on mountain roads or
when towing a trailer or caravan), it can be
advantageous to switch temporarily to the
manual shift programme ››› page 159 so that
the gear ratios can be selected manually to
suit driving conditions.
Technical data
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up shortly before the maximum engine speed is reached.
In this position, the gearbox automatically
changes to a lower or higher gear, depending
on engine requirements, the driving speed
and the gear shift programme.
To move the selector lever to position D from
position N at speeds of less than 5 km/h (3
mph) and when the vehicle is stationary,
press down on the brake pedal.
The manual gearbox can be activated when
the vehicle is either moving or stationary.
The kick-down function is also available in
manual shift mode.
Selector lever lock
Emergencies
D
Tiptronic
Automatic selector lever lock 
The selector lever is locked in the positions P
and N when the ignition is on. Press down on
the brake to unlock it. Remember, if the selector lever is in positions P and N, the warning lamp  will light up on the general instrument panel.
When the selector lever merely moves
through position N (e.g. when moved from R
to D), the lever lock is not applied. This
makes it possible, for example, to rock a
stuck vehicle backwards and forwards. The
Safety
more than 2 seconds) to position D or R at
speeds of less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and
when the vehicle is stationary, press down on
the brake pedal.
»
159
Operation
lock is only applied if the brake is not pressed and the selector lever is moved to position
N for more than 2 seconds.
shifts up as quickly as possible and shifts
down as late as possible, thus increasing
driving economy.
The selector lever only locks when the is vehicle stationary or driving at a speed lower
than 5 km/h (3 mph). At a higher speed, it
automatically disconnects in the N position.
With a sporty driving style, characterised by
sudden acceleration, heavy acceleration,
speeds that often increase and decrease and
maximum speed, the gearbox adapts to this
driving style when the accelerator is pressed
down fully (kick-down) by shifting down as
quickly as possible and can even shift down
by several gears at once.
Interlock button
The interlock button on the selector lever
knob prevents the driver from inadvertently
engaging a gear. Press the button to unlock
the selector lever.
Safety interlock for ignition
key 1)
After switching off the ignition, you can only
remove the ignition key if the selector lever is
in position P. When the ignition key is removed, the selector lever is locked in position P.
Driving programmes
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically-controlled automatic gearbox. Shifting up
or down depends on the programme selected.
For a calm driving style, the gearbox uses the
most economic programme. The gearbox
1)
160
Valid only for certain countries.
Selecting the best driving programmes is an
endless job. Regardless of this, the driver can
also make the gearbox switch to a more dynamic gear shift programme by pressing the
accelerator quickly. This makes the automatic
gearbox shift down into a lower gear than the
one that would normally apply to the current
speed, allowing for more rapid acceleration
(e.g. to overtake another vehicle) without
having to press the accelerator until the kickdown position. On shifting up in a corresponding driving style, the gearbox returns to
the original programme.
When driving along mountain roads, the
gearbox adapts to the gradients. This avoids
having to frequently change gears when driving uphill. In Tiptronic mode, it is possible to
shift down manually when driving downhill to
use the braking effect of the engine.
Backup programme
A back-up programme exists in case of faults.
In the event of a fault in the gearbox electronics, it will continue to work in one of the corresponding back-up programmes. All segments of the screen are lit up or switched off.
The fault can be seen as follows:
● The gearbox only engages certain gears
● Reverse gear R cannot be engaged
● The manual gearbox switches off in the
back-up programme
Note
If the gearbox switches to the back-up programme, visit an Authorised Service as soon
as possible to solve the problem.
Gearbox malfunctions
 Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle and place the lever in the
position P.
There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
Driving
 Gearbox: System fault! You
can continue driving in D until
switching off the engine
Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away
from moving traffic. Seek specialist assistance.
 Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
driving accordingly
Continue driving at moderate speeds. When
the warning lamp switches off, you can continue driving in a normal manner.
 Gearbox: press the brake and
engage a gear again.
If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a
high temperature, this driver message will be
displayed when the gearbox has cooled
again.
Up to 1000 kilometres
– Do not drive at more than 3/4 of the maxi-
mum speed corresponding to the engaged
gear, i.e. up to 3/4 of the maximum permitted engine speed.
– Do not drive at full speed.
– Avoid high engine speeds.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900
miles)
– Slowly increase the engine speed until
reaching the maximum permitted speed of
the engaged gear, i.e. the maximum permitted engine speed.
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than
later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in. How the vehicle is driven over approximately the first 1,500 kilometres (900
miles), determines the success of the process of running in the engine.
Technical data
Advice
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
and have the fault repaired without delay.
Over the first 1,500 kilometres the engine
must be run in.
Operation
 Gearbox: System fault! You
can continue driving with restrictions. Reverse gear disa‐
bled
The first 1,500 km
Even after running in, the vehicle should not
be unnecessarily driven at high engine
speeds. The maximum permitted engine
speed is marked at the start of the red zone
on the rev counter dial. The gear must be
changed up when the red area is reached in
vehicles with a manual gearbox. Extremely
high engine speeds when accelerating are
automatically limited, however the engine is
not protected against high engine speeds
produced by incorrectly changing to a lower
gear, which could cause the engine to run at
revs above the maximum permitted amount,
and consequently result in damage to the engine.
Additionally, vehicles with a manual gearbox
must also bear the following in mind: do not
drive with the engine speed too low. Change
down to a lower gear when the engine no
longer runs smoothly. Observe the recommendations for changing gear
›››  page 25.
Emergencies
Have the fault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Run-in and economical driving
New tyres
New tyres must be submitted to “running in”,
given that initially their grip is not yet at the
maximum level. During the first 500 km (120
miles) drive very carefully.
Safety
 Gearbox: System fault! You
may continue driving.
New brake pads
New brake pads do not yet provide maximum
friction capacity. First they must be “run in”.
»
161
Operation
During the first 200 km (120 miles) drive very
carefully.
● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629.
CAUTION
All the information for speed and engine
speed refers to an engine that operates at operating temperature. Do not run the engine at
high engine speeds, neither when stopped or
while driving.
Choice of materials
Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine
speeds; changing to a higher gear sooner
contributes to saving fuel, reduces operating
noise and protects the environment.
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the design, choice of materials and manufacture of your new SEAT.
● Use of compatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
● Reduction of volatile components, includ-
ing odour, in plastic materials.
● Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
● Use of plastic film as protection during ve-
● Joints and connections designed for easy
● Use of solvent-free adhesives.
● Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling
● Increased use of single-grade materials.
162
originating from renewable sources.
Constructive measures to encourage recycling
dismantling
● The use of water-soluble paints.
● Use of recycled materials.
● Use of recycled materials and/or materials
For the sake of the environment
● Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
hicle transport.
● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
Economical and environmentallyfriendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By
adopting an economical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.
Some tips on how to help you reduce pollution while saving money are listed below.
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.
When you anticipate situations, you have to
brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If
it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear
engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this
way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and
tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are
reduced to zero (disconnection due to inertia).
● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
Change gear early to save energy
● Improvement in the quality of waste water.
An effective way of saving fuel is to change
up quickly through the gears. Running the
Driving
We advise you not to drive at the top speed
permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,
exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving
at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid short journeys
Avoid idling
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is
proportionally higher. The engine does not
warm up and fuel consumption does not normalise until having driven approximately four
kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend avoiding short trips whenever possible.
It is worthwhile switching off the engine
when waiting in a traffic jam, at level crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase.
The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is
greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore
best to drive off immediately after starting
the engine. Avoid running the engine at high
speed.
To reduce the consumption and emission of
polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the
exhaust gas filtration systems should reach
the optimum operating temperature.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pressure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too
low, fuel consumption can increase by as
much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear
wear and impairs handling.
Technical data
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Given that every kilo of extra weight will increase the fuel consumption, it is advisable
to always check the luggage compartment to
make sure that no unnecessary loads are being transported.
Advice
A badly serviced engine can consume up to
10% more fuel than necessary.
The tyre pressures should always be checked
when the tyres are cold.
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake
of convenience, even when it is no longer
needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph)
and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use
about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra
wind resistance caused by the roof rack even
when it is not in use.
Operation
Avoid driving at high speed
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,
before beginning a journey, you will not consume more than the required amount of fuel.
A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit
of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
Emergencies
Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second
gear as soon as possible. We recommend
that, whenever possible, you change to a
higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow
the “recommended gear” indication that appears on the instrument panel
›››  page 25.
Periodic maintenance
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which
produces electricity. With the need for electricity, fuel consumption also increases. Because of this, always turn off electrical devices when you do not need them. Examples of
devices that use a lot of electricity are: the
fan at high speeds, the rear window heating
and the seat heaters*.
Safety
engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses
an unnecessary amount of fuel.
Note
● If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec-
ommended to switch this function off.
»
163
Operation
● It is recommended that you close the windows when driving at more than 60 km/h
(37 mph)
● Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the
plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can
burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious
fault.
● Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption
will be lower and you will prevent the clutch
plate from being damaged.
● On descents, use the engine brake, chang-
ing to the gear that is more suitable for the
slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and
the brakes will not suffer.
Engine management and exhaust gas purification system
Introduction
● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
Note
While the control lamps , ,  or  remain lit, there may be engine problems, fuel
consumption may increase and the engine
may lose power.
● Because of the high temperatures which
can occur in the exhaust purification system
(catalytic converter or diesel particulate filter), do not park the vehicle where the exhaust can come into contact with flammable
materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at
the forest edge). Fire hazard!
164
ular fuel supply can cause ignition faults,
which can result in damage to a substantial
amount of engine parts and the exhaust system.
● Refuelling just once with leaded petrol disables the exhaust system!
Particulate filter  (diesel engines)
Catalytic converter
An exhaust gas emission control system (catalytic converter) that functions perfectly is vitally important for vehicle operation that respects the environment.
Please observe the following indications:
● Refuel only using unleaded petrol in petrol
engine vehicles ››› page 200.
● Do not add too much oil to the engine
››› page 207, Checking engine oil level.
● Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
WARNING
CAUTION
● Never completely empty the tank! An irreg-
If you are required to drive in a country where
unleaded fuel is not available, when returning to a country where using a catalytic converter is obligatory, the catalytic converter
must be replaced.
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates
most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is
cleaned automatically without need for indication by the warning lamp . This may be
noticed because the engine idle speed increases and an odour may be detected.
If automatic filter purification cannot be carried out (because only short trips are taken,
for example), soot will accumulate on the filter and the Diesel particulate filter warning
lamp will  switch on.
Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning process by driving in the following manner: drive
for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum
speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear
(automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the engine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The
● Always drive according to the road weather
conditions, the terrain and traffic.
● The particulate filter attains very high tem-
peratures. Therefore, do not park the vehicle
in places where the exhaust pipe could come
into contact with dry grass or with highlyflammable materials. Risk of fire!
CAUTION
While the warning lamp  is lit up, the fuel
consumption is high, and in certain conditions, the engine power is reduced.
The warning lamp lights up to show that the
glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.
The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition is switched
on while system operation is being verified. It
should go out once the engine is started.
The control lamp  lights up
If there is a fault in the electronic engine
management system while you are driving,
this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as
possible and have the engine checked.
Emission control system* 
Control lamp  flashes:
● In order for the particulate filter to burn off
soot in a correct manner, avoid carrying out
frequent short journeys.
The control lamp  lights up:
● Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur count
can considerably reduce the useful life of the
particulate filter. The specialised service pro-
If the control lamp  lights up when the engine is started it means that the glow plugs
are preheating. The engine can be started
straight away when the lamp switches off.
Control lamp  flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management
system while you are driving, the glow plug
system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to
a specialised workshop as soon as possible
and have the engine checked.
Advice
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system for petrol engines.
When there is misfiring that can damage the
catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive
carefully to the nearest specialised workshop
to have the engine checked.
Note
Engine pre-heating/fault system* 
Operation
WARNING
Engine management* 
drive carefully to the nearest specialised
workshop to have the engine checked.
Emergencies
If the lamp  does not turn off, or the three
lamps turn on (particulate filter , fault in
the emission control system  and glow
plugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialised
workshop and have the fault repaired at the
earliest opportunity.
vides information about the countries where
fuel with a high sulphur content is used.
Safety
rise in temperature causes the soot on the filter to burn. On completion of the cleaning
the warning lamp will switch off.
Technical data
Driving
If a fault has developed during driving which
has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas
(e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and
165
Operation
Driving tips
Driving through flooded roads
WARNING
● Driving through water, dirt and mud can re-
duce braking capability and prolong the braking distance – Risk of accident!
Note
After driving through water we recommend
that you contact a specialised service for an
inspection.
● Do not carry out any sudden or strong brak-
ing manoeuvres after driving through water.
● Clean and dry the brakes as soon as possi-
ble after driving through water by breaking
intermittently. Carry out braking in order to
dry the brakes and clean the brake discs only
if traffic so permits. Do not put other drivers
at risk.
Fig. 180 Driving through water.
CAUTION
● In the event of driving through water, parts
To prevent the vehicle from being damaged
when driving through water (i.e. flooded
roads), please observe the following:
● Determine the depth of the water before
entering. Water can reach a maximum height
of below the door sill ››› Fig. 180.
● Drive at a maximum pace of walking speed.
Driving at a higher speed can cause a wave
in front of the vehicle, which can cause water
to enter the engine air intake system or other
parts of the vehicle.
● Never stop in the water, never reverse and
never stop the engine.
● Before driving through water deactivate the
Start-Stop system ››› page 181.
166
of the vehicle can be seriously damaged,
such as the engine, gearbox, catalytic converter, suspension or the electrical system.
● Oncoming vehicles that drive through water can cause waves that exceed your vehicle's permitted level for driving through water.
● There may be pot-holes mud or rocks under
the water that can hinder or prevent driving
through water.
● Do not drive through salt water. The salt
can cause rust. All components that are exposed to salt water must be rinsed immediately with fresh water.
Preventing damage to the vehicle
In order to prevent damage to the vehicle,
take special care:
● on roads that are in poor condition,
● when mounting kerbs,
● when approaching very steep ramps, etc.,
● with the parts of the vehicle situated on the
lower part of the vehicle, i.e. the spoiler, the
exhaust pipe.
This applies especially to vehicles with a very
low suspension (sport) and when the vehicle
is fully loaded.
Driver assistance systems
The rear parking aid is an audible assistant
that warns about obstacles located behind
the vehicle ››› page 168.
During parking, Parking System Plus assists
the driver by visually and audibly warning
them about obstacles detected in front and
behind the vehicle ››› page 168.
WARNING
● Always pay attention, also when looking
straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle surroundings. The assistance systems are not a
replacement for driver awareness. When inserting or removing the vehicle from a parking space, or when performing similar manoeuvres the driver always assumes the responsibility.
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in
which obstacles and people are not regis-
CAUTION
Parking Aid functions may be negatively affected by different factors that may lead to
damage to the vehicle or its immediate surrounds:
● Under certain circumstances, the system
does not detect or display certain objects:
– Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars,
fences, posts and thin trees.
– Objects that are located above the sen-
sors, such as protrusions in a wall.
– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-
tures, such as wire mesh fences or powder snow.
● Certain surfaces of objects and garments
do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' signals. The system cannot detect, at least correctly, these objects or people wearing such
clothes.
● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected
Technical data
● If the first warning from the Parking Aid is
ignored, the vehicle could suffer considerable
damage.
● The knocks or damage on the radiator
grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can adjust the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the parking aid function.
Have the function checked by a specialised
workshop.
Advice
Various systems are available to help you
when parking or manoeuvring in tight
spaces, depending on the equipment fitted
on your vehicle.
surroundings: use the mirrors for additional
help.
Operation
General information
● Always keep visual control of the vehicle
system will not give any further warning. In
certain circumstances, objects such as high
kerbs that could damage the bottom of the
vehicle are not detected either.
Note
● In certain situations, the system can give a
warning even though there is no obstacle in
the detected area, e.g:
– with rough or cobbled floors or ground
with long grass;
Emergencies
Parking aid
tered. Pay special attention to children and
animals.
– with external ultrasound sources, such as
cleaning vehicles or other vehicles;
– In downpours, intense snow or dense ex-
haust gases;
– if the registration plate (front or rear) is
not properly affixed to the bumper surface;
by external sound sources. In certain circumstances this may prevent them from detecting people or objects.
● In order to guarantee good system opera-
● Please note that low obstacles detected by
the system may no longer be registered by
the sensors as the car moves closer, so the
tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free
of snow or ice, and do not cover them with
adhesives or other objects.
Safety
Driver assistance systems
– or in locations such as the brow of a hill.
»
167
Operation
● If you use high-pressure or vapour equipment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply
it directly only very briefly and always from a
distance of more than 10 cm.
● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,
such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the
operation of the Parking Aid.
● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-
tem, it is advised that you practice parking in
an area or car park that is free from traffic.
There must be good weather and light conditions.
● The volume and tone of the warnings can
be modified, in addition to the indications
››› page 171.
● In vehicles without a driver information
system, these parameters can be modified in
a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised
workshop.
● Please observe information on towing a
trailer ››› page 171.
● The display on the Easy Connect screen
shows a slight time delay.
Rear parking aid*
The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in
parking by means of audible warning
sounds.
168
Description
There are sensors integrated in the rear
bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues and the
like, as this could affect the system's operation. Cleaning instructions ››› page 195.
On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid
system is disconnected immediately.
Parking system plus*
The approximate measurement range of the
rear sensors is:
side area
0.90 m
central area
1.60 m
As you approach the obstacle, the time interval between the audible warnings will be reduced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
warning will be constant: Do not continue to
move forward (or backward) ››› in General
information on page 167, ››› in General information on page 167 !
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
after four seconds (does not affect the tone
of the constant warning).
Activating/Deactivating
When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid
is automatically switched on. This is confirmed with a short warning.
Fig. 181 Represented area.
Parking system plus assists you audibly and
visually when parking.
There are sensors integrated in the front and
rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle,
you are alerted by audible warnings and visually on the Easy Connect system.
In the event of danger of a frontal collision,
the audible warnings come from the front of
the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of
a rear-end collision they come from the rear.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues and the
like, as this could affect the system's operation. Cleaning instructions ››› page 195.
B
0.90 m
C
1.60 m
D
0.90 m
As you approach the obstacle, the time interval between the audible warnings will be reduced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
warning will be constant: do not continue to
move forward (or backward)!
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
after four seconds (does not affect the tone
of the constant warning).
Parking Aid Operation
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid
● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.
lever to position R.
● Press the  button again.
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display
(the audible sounds remain active)
If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image
(Rear View Camera “RVC”)
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-
lever to position R.
tory-assembled infotainment system.
● OR: Press the RVC function button.
● OR: press the BACK function button.
Automatic connection of Parking Aid
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
Advice
1.20 m
Change from reduced view to full view
● Press the  button once.
A short confirmation signal will be heard and
the button symbol will light up yellow when
the system is switched on.
Operation
A
Manual connection of Parking Aid
lever to position R.
● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle
that is in its forwards path at a speed below
10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 169, Automatic activation. The obstacle is detected as of a distance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic connection is activated in the infotainment system. A reduced display is shown.
Automatic activation
Emergencies
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
Technical data
Driver assistance systems
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
● Move the selector lever to position P.
10 km/h (6 mph) forward.
Fig. 182 Centre console: parking aid button.
Temporary suppression of sound in Parking
Aid
● Press the  function button.
Safety
● OR: accelerate to more than approx.
Fig. 183 Miniature indication of automatic ac-
tivation
When the Parking System Plus is switched on
automatically, a miniature of the vehicle will
»
169
Operation
be displayed and the segments will be
shown on the left side of the screen
››› Fig. 183.
Automatic activation occurs when slowly approaching an obstacle located in front of the
vehicle. It only operates every time the speed
is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6
mph) for the first time.
If the parking aid is switched off using the 
button, the following actions must be carried
out in order for it to automatically switch on:
● Switch off the ignition and switch it on
again.
If the system has been activated automatically, an audible sound warning will only be given when obstacles in front are at a distance
of less than 50 cm.
CAUTION
The automatic connection of the Parking Aid
only works when you are driving slowly. If
driving style is not adapted to the circumstances, an accident and serious injury or
damage may be caused.
Segments of the visual indication
● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) before reducing speed below this number
again.
and then move it from this position.
● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-
tion in the Easy Connect system menu.
● Switch the ignition on.
● Select: CAR button > Settings > Parking
and manoeuvring.
● Select the Automatic activation option. When the function button check box is
activated , the function is on.
170
Yellow segments: obstacles located in the
vehicle's trajectory and which are more
than 30 cm away from the vehicle are
displayed in yellow.
Red segments: obstacles that are less than
30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in red.
Moreover, with the SEAT Media System
Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indicates the vehicle's expected journey based
on the steering wheel angle.
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehicle’s direction of travel, the corresponding
audible warning will sound.
● OR: place the selector lever in position P
The automatic activation with parking aid
miniature indication can be switched on and
off from the Easy Connect system menu
›››  page 21:
White segments: a white segment is displayed when the obstacle is not within
the vehicle's trajectory or the direction
of travel is in the opposite direction to
its location.
Fig. 184 Parking Aid display on the Easy Connect system screen.
The distance of separation from the obstacle
can be estimated using the segments around
the vehicle.
The optical indication of the segments works
as follows:
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
this means that the vehicle has reached the
collision zone. In the collision zone, the obstacles are represented in red, including
those out of the path. Do not continue to
move forward (or backward) ››› in General
information on page 167, ››› in General information on page 167 !
Driver assistance systems
 off – deactivates the Automatic activation option ››› page 169.
Front volume*
Volume in the front and rear area.
Front sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front
area.
Rear volume*
Volume in the rear area.
Rear sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear
area.
Adjust volume
Technical data
The Easy Connect system screen will only display objects detected at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.
Advice
 on – activates the Automatic activation option ››› page 169.
The distance to possible obstacles at the rear
of the vehicle will not be displayed on the
screen and nor will it be indicated by means
of audible sound signals.
Parking System Plus*
If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is
displayed on the Easy Connect display in
front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is
faulty, only the obstacles in the areas A and
B are displayed ››› Fig. 181. If a front sensor
is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C
and D are displayed.
Have the fault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Towing bracket
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
device from the factory, when the trailer is
connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear
sensors will not be activated when reverse
gear is engaged, when the selector lever is
turned to position R or when the button  is
pressed.
Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”*
Operation
Automatic activation
When the Parking Aid is activated or when it
is switched on, if a continuous warning can
be heard for several seconds (additionally, in
the case of Parking system Plus, the LED of
the  button flashes), there is a fault in the
system.
Parking System Plus
Operating and safety warnings
WARNING
● The Rear Assist does not make it possible
to precisely calculate the distance from obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it
overcome the system's own limits, hence using it may cause serious accidents and injuries if used negligently or without due care.
The driver should be aware of his/her surroundings at all times to ensure safe driving.
Emergencies
The settings for the display and audible
warnings are controlled via the Easy Connect*.
Error messages
● The camera lens expands and distorts the
field of vision and displays the objects on the
screen in a different, vague manner. The perception of distances is also distorted by this
effect.
»
Safety
Adjusting the display and audible
warnings
With the parking aid switched on, the active
audio/video source volume will be reduced
to the intensity of the selected setting.
171
Operation
● Some objects may, due to the resolution of
the display screen - not be displayed in a satisfactory manner or may not be displayed at
all. Take special care with thin posts, fences,
railings or trees that might not be displayed
on screen and could damage the vehicle.
● The rear assist has blind spots where it is
not possible to represent people or objects
(small children, animals and certain objects
cannot be detected in its field of vision). Monitor the vehicle's surrounding area at all
times.
● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and
snow, and do not cover it.
● The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness. Supervise the parking operation
at all times, as well as the vehicle's surrounding area. Adapt your speed and driving style
at all times to suit visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
● Do not be distracted from the traffic by
looking at the screen.
● The images on the rear assist screen are
only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial
depth, protruding parts or holes in the road,
for example, are more difficult to detect or
may not be seen at all.
● Vehicle load modifies the representation of
the orientation lines displayed. The width
represented by the lines diminishes with vehicle load. Pay special attention to the vehicle's surroundings when the inside of the vehicle of the luggage compartment is carrying
a heavy load.
172
● In the following situations, the objects or
other vehicles shown in the navigation system display appear to be further away or
closer than they really are: Pay special attention:
Instructions for use
– On moving from a horizontal plane to a
slope.
– On moving from a slope to a horizontal
plane.
– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the
rear.
– When the vehicle approaches objects
that are not on the ground surface or are
jutting out from it. These objects may also be outside the camera's angle of vision when reversing.
Note
● It is important to take great care and pay
special attention if you are not yet familiar
with the system.
● Rear assist will not be available if the vehicle's rear lid is open.
Fig. 185 On the rear bumper: location of the
rear assist camera
A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver
during reverse parking or manoeuvring
››› Fig. 185. The camera image is viewed together with orientation lines projected by the
system on the Infotainment system screen.
The bottom of the screen displays part of the
bumper corresponding to the number plate
area that will be used as reference by the
driver.
Rear assist settings:
Rear assist offers the user the possibility to
change the image's brightness, contrast and
colour settings.
To change these settings:
● Park the vehicle in a safe place.
● Apply the parking brake.
Driver assistance systems
● Press the --- function button displayed on
Cleaning the camera lens
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow
and ice:
the right of the image.
● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-
● Make the desired adjustments on the menu
based glass cleaning product and clean the
lens with a dry cloth.
by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by
moving the corresponding scroll button.
Necessary conditions for parking and manoeuvring with the
The system should not be used in the following cases:
● If the image displayed is not very reliable or
is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty
lens.
● Remove snow using a small brush.
● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.
CAUTION
● Never use abrasive cleaning products to
clean the camera lens.
● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could
damage the camera.
Fig. 186 Display on the Infotainment system
screen: orientation lines.
Switching the system on and off
● The rear assist will switch on when the igni-
played very clearly or is incomplete.
tion is on or the engine running, on engaging
reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on changing the selector lever to the R position (automatic gearbox).
● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
● The system switches off 8 seconds after
● If the position and installation angle of the
disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)
or removing the selector lever from the R position (automatic gearbox). The system will
also disconnect immediately after the ignition is switched off.
● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-
camera have been changed, e.g. after a rearend collision. Have the system checked by a
specialised workshop.
Familiarising yourself with the system
To familiarise yourself with the system, the
orientation lines and their function, SEAT recommends practising parking and manoeuvring with the rear assist in a place without
Technical data
lever to position R.
Advice
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
Parking and manoeuvring with the
rear assist
Operation
system.
too much traffic or in a car park when there
are good weather and visibility conditions.
Emergencies
● If necessary, switch on the Infotainment
Safety
● Switch the ignition on.
In combination with the Parking System Plus
››› page 167, the camera image will cease to
be transmitted immediately when reverse
gear is engaged or when the selector lever is
moved from the R position, and the optical
»
173
Operation
information provided by the Parking Aid system will be displayed.
Also in combination with the system, the rear
assist image can also be concealed:
● By pressing one of the Infotainment system
buttons on the display.
3
Intermediate line: indicates a distance of
approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on
the road surface.
4
Red horizontal line: indicates a safe distance of approximately 40 cm at the rear
of the vehicle on the road surface.
● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that
Parking manoeuvre
appears on the left of the screen (which
switches to the full-screen mode of the Parking System Plus's optical system).
● Place the vehicle in front of the parking
If you wish to display the rear assist image
again:
● Disengage reverse, or change the selector
lever's position, engage reverse again or
move the selector lever to position R.
● OR: Press the RVC function button1)
space and engage reverse gear (manual
gearbox) or move the selector to the R position (automatic gearbox).
● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel
so that the side orientation lines lead towards the parking space.
● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
that the side orientation lines run parallel to
it.
1
2
1)
174
Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the
approximate width of the vehicle plus the
rear view mirrors) on the road surface.
End of the side lines: the area marked in
green ends approximately 2 m behind
the vehicle on the road surface.
WARNING: the RVC function button will only be activated and available when the reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to position R.
The  warning lamp lights up on the general
instrument panel if cruise control is switched
on.
WARNING
● For safety reasons the cruise control sys-
tem must not be used in dense traffic or
where roads conditions are poor (e.g. due to
ice, aquaplaning, loose grit, snow). – Risk of
accident!
● The programmed speed can only be re-es-
tablished if it is not too high for current traffic conditions.
● Always switch the cruise control system off
Meaning of the orientation lines
››› Fig. 186
The cruise control system allows you to drive
at a constant speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) or
higher without having to press the accelerator. However, the speed is only maintained
within the margin permitted by the engine
power and the braking effect of the engine.
cruise speed (Cruise control)*
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 31
after using it in order to avoid involuntary
use.
CAUTION
● The cruise control cannot maintain a con-
stant speed when the vehicle is moving
downhill. The vehicle tends to accelerate under its own weight. Therefore, shift down or
Setting the speed
On releasing rocker switch 2 from SET, the
current speed is stored and will remain constant without having to press the accelerator
pedal.
– If the button is held down in the SET posi-
Increasing speed by pressing the accelerator
pedal
– Press the accelerator to increase the speed
– Release the accelerator and the previously
programmed speed will be resumed.
If, when pressing the accelerator, the vehicle
exceeds the programmed speed by more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) for more than 3 minutes, the set speed will be deleted. The
speed will have to be stored again.
Fig. 187 Turn signal and main beam head-
Increasing speed by pressing switch
light lever: cruise control buttons.
– Press rocker switch 2
– Move knob 1
››› page 175 in RES.
tion.
››› Fig. 187 to the ON posi-
2
››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 in SET.
tion, the speed decreases continuously. Release the switch when the required speed
is reached. The speed is stored.
– On releasing the switch at speeds of less
Adjust the stored speed
of the vehicle.
Setting speed
switch
2
››› Fig. 187
– If the button is held down in the RES posi-
tion, the speed increases continuously. Release the switch when the required speed
is reached. The speed is stored.
than 30 km/h (19 mph), no speed will be
set and the memory will be deleted. The vehicle must be moving at a speed of over
30 km/h (19 mph) and switch 2 pressed
again to SET for it to be set.
The speed can be reduced by pressing the
brake pedal, which temporarily switches off
the cruise control.
Temporary deactivation of cruise control
Cruise control is switched off temporarily by
pressing switch 1 ››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 in
CANCEL or by pressing the brake or clutch
pedal.
The set speed is stored.
To recover the set speed, briefly press switch
2 in RES once you have released the brake
or clutch pedal.
Advice
● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, the
cruise control cannot be switched on if first
gear or reverse gear is engaged.
– The set speed can be reduced by pressing
Operation
● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the
cruise control system cannot be switched on
if the selector lever is in position P, N or R.
Setting a lower speed
tion when you have reached the speed you
wish to set.
Emergencies
Note
– Briefly press rocker switch 2 in SET posi-
Safety
use the brake pedal in good time to slow the
vehicle.
Technical data
Driver assistance systems
175
Operation
Turning off the cruise control system
– Move knob 1
OFF.
››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 to
Monitoring system Front Assist*
Introduction
The Front Assist Monitoring system helps to
prevent rear collisions.
The Front Assist can warn the driver of collision hazards, prepare the vehicle for emergency braking in case of danger, assist the
driver on braking and cause automatic braking.
The Front Assist is not a replacement for
driver awareness.
Distance warning
If the system detects that safety is endangered by the proximity of the vehicle in front,
it may warn the driver by means of a message
on the instrument panel when driving at a
speed of between approximately 60 km/h
(37 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph)
››› Fig. 188.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic situation and driver behaviour.
176
Advance warning
Front assist
If the system detects a possible collision with
the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by
means of an audible warning and an indication on the instrument panel when driving at
a speed of between approximately 30 km/h
(18 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph)
››› Fig. 188.
If the Front Assist notices that the driver is
not braking sufficiently in case of a collision
hazard, the system can increase braking effect and thus avert the collision when driving
at a speed of between approximately 5 km/h
(3 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph). Front assist only acts while the brake pedal is pressed down hard.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
possible emergency braking ››› .
Critical warning
If the driver fails to react to the advance
warning, the system may actively intervene in
the brakes when driving at a speed of between approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and
210 km/h (130 mph), generating a brief jolt
to warn of the imminent collision.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the advance
warning, the system may brake the vehicle
automatically, by progressively increasing
braking effect driving at a speed of between
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph) and 210 km/h
(130 mph). By reducing speed in case of a
possible collision, the system may contribute
to reducing the consequences of an accident.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Front Assist
cannot change the laws of physics. The driver
is always responsible for braking in time. If
the Front Assist issues a warning, then, depending on the traffic circumstances, you
must brake immediately or dodge the obstacle.
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
dents and serious injuries.
● In complex driving situations, the Front As-
sist may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in
traffic islands.
● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-
paired, for example, by dirt or because the radar sensor has lost its settings, the system
may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inopportunely in the braking.
Driver assistance systems
On-screen warning lamps and messages
Radar sensor
Technical data
● During driving, the Front Assist does not react to people or animals or vehicles crossing
your path or which approach you head-on in
the same lane.
● The driver must always be ready to take
over the control of the vehicle.
Advice
Note
● When the Front Assist causes a braking,
the brake pedal is “harder”.
Distance warning
If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle
in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will
appear on the instrument panel display
.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
and control lamps on page 98.
in Warning
Note
When the Front Assist is connected, the indications on the instrument panel screen may
be concealed by warnings from other functions, such as an incoming call.
A radar sensor is installed on the front bumper to determine the traffic situation
››› Fig. 189 1 . This sensor can detect vehicles in front up to a distance of approximately
120 m.
Operation
Warning indications.
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired
by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental influences such as rain or mist. In this case the
Front Assist monitoring system does not
work. The instrument panel displays the following message: Front Assist: No
sensor vision! If necessary clean the radar sensor ››› .
When the radar sensor begins to operate
properly again, the Front Assist will automatically be available again. The message will
disappear from the instrument panel display.
Emergencies
● If the Front Assist does not work as described in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several
times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the
system checked by a specialised workshop.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.
Fig. 189 On the front bumper: radar sensor.
Fig. 188 On the instrument panel display:
Safety
● Automatic interventions by the Front Assist
on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing
the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.
»
177
Operation
Front Assist operation may be affected by a
strong radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for example, in a closed car park or due
to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails
on the road or sheets used in road works).
The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect Front Assist operation.
If structural modifications are made to the vehicle, for example, if the suspension is lowered or the front spoiler is modified, Front Assist operation may be affected. So structural
modifications should only be made by specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership for this purpose.
ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compromise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.
● Repairs to the radar sensor require specialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.
● Clean away the snow with a brush and the
ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer
spray.
Fig. 191 On the turn signal and main beam
Operating the Front Assist monitoring
system
The Front Assist monitoring system is active
whenever the ignition is switched on.
When the Front Assist is switched off, so too
are the advance warning function (pre warning) and the distance warning.
If work is done incorrectly on the front of the
vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged
or lose its settings, and Front Assist operation may be affected. So repair work should
only be made by specialised workshops.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
for this purpose.
CAUTION
If you have the sensation that the radar sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, disconnect the Front Assist. This will avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
● The sensor may become damaged or lose
its settings when knocked, for example, dur178
headlight lever: button for the driver assistance systems
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist always switched on. Exceptions ››› page 179,
Switching the Front Assist Monitoring System off in the following situations.
Fig. 190 On the instrument panel display:
Front Assist switched off message.
Switching the Front Assist monitoring system on and off
With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist can be switched on and off as follows:
● Select the corresponding menu option us-
ing the button for the driver assistance systems ››› Fig. 191.
Driver assistance systems
The pre-warning function can be switched on
or off in the Easy Connect system with the
button  and the function buttons  and
Driver Assist ›››  page 21.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the advance
warning function switched on at all times.
Switching distance warning on and off
If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle
in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will
appear on the instrument panel display
. In this case, increase the safe distance.
The distance warning function can be activated or deactivated in the Easy Connect system with the button  and the function buttons  and Driver Assist ›››  page 21.
In the following situations the Front Assist
Monitoring System should be deactivated
due to the system's limitations ››› :
The following conditions may cause the Front
Assist Monitoring System not to react or do
so too late:
● When the vehicle is to be towed.
● On taking tight bends.
● If the vehicle is on a test bed.
● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
● When the radar sensor is damaged.
● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-
● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for
aged.
example in a rear collision.
● If the ASR has been manually disconnec-
● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
ted.
● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily
● If the ESC is controlling.
with some kind of accessory, such as an additional headlight or the like.
● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,
● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
ferry or train.
● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the
WARNING
If the Front Assist is not switched off in the
situations described, serious accidents and
injuries may occur.
Technical data
Advice
Switching the Front Assist Monitoring
System off in the following situations
The Front Assist Monitoring System has certain physical limitations inherent in the system. Thus, in certain circumstances some of
the system's reactions may be inopportune
or be delayed from the driver's standpoint.
So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary.
Operation
Switching the advance warning function on
or off
SEAT recommends keeping the distance
warning switched on at all times.
System limitations
Emergencies
When the Front Assist monitoring system is
switched off, the instrument panel will inform
that it has been switched off with the following indicator  ››› Fig. 190.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
trically connected trailer are damaged.
road or sheets used in road works.
● If the vehicle is reversing.
Safety
● OR: switch the system on or off in the Easy
Connect system with the button  and the
function buttons  and Driver Assist
›››  page 21.
● If the vehicle over-accelerates.
● In case of snow or heavy rain.
● Switch off the Front Assist in critical situa-
● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-
tions.
bikes.
»
179
Operation
● Misaligned vehicles.
● Vehicles crossing the other's path.
● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
tion.
● Special loads and accessories of other ve-
hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards
or over the top.
City Emergency braking function
Easy Connect system with the button  and
the function buttons  and Driver Assist
›››  page 21.
laws of physics. The driver is always responsible for braking in time.
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
The City Emergency braking function picks
up, at speeds between 5 km/h (3 mph) and
30 km/h (19 mph) approximately, the traffic
situation in front of the vehicle up to a distance of about 10 m.
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
If the system detects a possible collision with
a vehicle in front of it, the vehicle prepares
for a possible emergency braking ››› .
Emergency braking function may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inopportunely
in braking, such as in work areas or if there
are metal rails.
If the driver fails to react to a possible collision, the system may brake the vehicle automatically, by progressively increasing braking
effect driving to reduce speed in the event of
a collision. The system can thus help to reduce the consequences of an accident.
● If the operation of the City Emergency brak-
● The City Emergency braking function alone
cannot prevent accidents or serious injury.
● In complex driving situations, the City
ing function is impaired, for example, by dirt
or because the radar sensor has lost its settings, the system may issue unnecessary
warnings and intervene inopportunely in the
braking.
● During driving, the City Emergency braking
Status display
Fig. 192 On the instrument panel display: ad-
vance warning message
The City Emergency braking function is part
of the Front Assist monitoring and is active
whenever the system is switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the pre-warning function can be switched on or off in the
180
1) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour
display is in colour.
Automatic deceleration by means of the City
Emergency braking function is displayed on
the instrument panel by means of the advance warning ››› Fig. 1921).
WARNING
The smart technology included in the City
Emergency braking function cannot defy the
function does not react to people or animals
or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane.
Note
● When the City Emergency braking function
causes a braking, the brake pedal is “harder”.
● Automatic interventions on the brakes by
the City Emergency braking function may be
Driver assistance systems
● If several inopportune intervenes occur,
switch off the Front Assist and with it the City
Emergency braking function. Take it to a specialised workshop, SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership.
cur, the City Emergency braking function may
switch off automatically.
● Selector lever in neutral.
Automatic engine shut down (Stop phase)
● Driver door closed.
– Stop the vehicle (if necessary using the
● The bonnet closed.
handbrake).
Start-Stop System*
Operating
– Shift to neutral.
– Release the clutch pedal.
button
● Clutch pedal not pressed.
● Driver with seat belt fastened.
● Vehicle stationary.
● The factory-fitted towing bracket is not elec-
trically connected to a trailer.
● Engine at operating temperature.
Automatic engine start up (Start phase)
● Vehicle's battery sufficiently charged.
– Press the clutch.
● Vehicle not on a very steep slope
Switching the Start-Stop system on and off
Fig. 193 Instrument panel: Start-Stop system
Conditions for automatic engine shut down
(Stop phase)
The current status of the Start-Stop system is
displayed on the general instrument panel
display.
● If numerous unnecessary interventions oc-
● Engine speed below 1,200 rpm.
● Vehicle battery temperature is neither too
The Start-Stop system can be switched on
and off by pressing the  ››› Fig. 193 button.
high nor too low.
The warning lamp in the button will light up
when the system is switched off.
and set interior temperature not too great
If the vehicle is in Stop phase when the button is pressed, the engine will start immediately.
Technical data
The system automatically switches off the engine when the vehicle is stationary, e.g. waiting at traffic lights.
Advice
The system is automatically switched on every time the ignition is switched on.
brake the vehicle until it stops completely.
However, the brake system does not halt the
vehicle permanently. Use the foot brake!
Operation
● The City Emergency braking function can
The Start-Stop system works under complex
driving conditions that are difficult to detect
without specialist technology. The set of necessary conditions for the correct operating of
the Start-Stop system are indicated below.
Emergencies
The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and reduce harmful and CO2 emissions.
● Sufficient brake system pressure.
● Difference between outside temperature
Safety
interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.
● Vehicle speed since the last time the en-
gine started was above 3 km/h (2 mph).
● Particulate filter not being cleaned
››› page 164.
»
181
Operation
● Front wheels not overly turned (steering
wheel turned less than three quarters of a
turn)
START-STOP IMPOSSIBLE
Engine cannot be automatically shut down
START-STOP ACTIVE
Automatic engine shut
down (Stop phase)
● Clutch pedal pressed.
SWITCH OFF IGNITION
Switch the ignition off
● Max./min. temperature set.
START MANUALLY
Start the engine manually
Conditions for engine start up (Start phase)
● Windscreen defrost function switched on.
● High blower speed.
● Start-Stop button pressed.
Conditions for automatic engine start up
without driver involvement
● Vehicle moving at a speed of over 3 km/h
(2 mph).
● Difference between outside temperature
and interior temperature is too great
● Vehicle's battery insufficiently charged.
● Insufficient brake system pressure.
If the driver seat belt is unfastened for more
than 30 seconds in Stop phase, the engine
must be started using the ignition key.
Please observe the messages on the general
instrument panel display.
Warnings on the instrument panel display
(valid for vehicles not fitted with an informative display)
FAULT: Start-Stop
182
Fault in the Start-Stop system
Tiredness detection (break recommendation)*
Introduction
The Fatigue detection informs the driver
when their driving behaviour shows signs of
fatigue.
WARNING
● If the engine is switched off, neither the
brake servo nor the power steering will work.
● Do not move the vehicle when the engine is
switched off.
CAUTION
Switch off the Start-Stop system ››› page 166
before driving through a pool of water on the
road.
Note
● The battery temperature may reflect
changes in outside temperature after several
hours. If the vehicle has been stopped outside at temperatures below zero or in direct
sunlight, for example, the battery temperature may take several hours to reach the values required for the correct operating of the
Start-Stop system.
● If the Climatronic system is operating auto-
matically, this could impair automatic engine
shut down under certain conditions.
WARNING
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue
detection system tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. Take regular breaks, sufficient in length when making long journeys.
● The driver always assumes the responsibil-
ity of driving to their full capacity.
● Never drive if you are tired.
● The system does not detect the tiredness of
the driver in all circumstances. Consult the information in the section ››› page 183, System
limitations.
● In some situations, the system may incor-
rectly interpret an intended driving manoeuvre as driver tiredness.
● No warning is given in the event of the ef-
fect called microsleep!
● Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Function and operation
The message can be recalled to the instrument panel display using the multifunction
display ›››  page 23.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
around 200 km/h (125 mph).
Switching on and off
Fig. 194 On the instrument panel display: fatigue detection symbol.
Fatigue detection determines the driving behaviour of the driver when starting a journey,
making a calculation of tiredness. This is
constantly compared with the current driving
behaviour. If the system detects that the driver is tired, an audible warning is given with a
sound and an optic warning is shown with a
symbol and complementary message on the
instrument panel display ››› Fig. 194. The
message on the instrument panel display is
Fatigue detection can be activated or deactivated in the Easy Connect system with the
button  and the function button 
››› page 99. A mark indicates that the adjustment has been activated.
● In unfavourable weather conditions
● When a sporty driving style is employed
● In the event of a serious distraction to the
driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the
vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
when the ignition is switched off or when the
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
opened the door.
In the event of slow driving during a long period of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the
system automatically re-establishes the tiredness calculation. When driving at a faster
speed the driving behaviour will be recalculated.
Advice
checked by a specialised workshop.
● On roads in poor condition
Operation
● If there is a fault in the system, have it
The message on the instrument panel display
can be switched off by pressing the 
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
button  on the multi function steering
wheel ›››  page 23.
● When cornering
Emergencies
● Fatigue detection has been developed for
driving on motorways and well paved roads
only.
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and depending on the case, is repeated. The system
stores the last message displayed.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
inherent to the system. The following conditions can limit the Fatigue detection or prevent it from functioning.
Safety
Note
Technical data
Driver assistance systems
● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
183
Operation
Towing bracket device
Driving with a trailer
Technical requirements
If your vehicle has a factory-fitted towing
bracket or is equipped with a selection of
SEAT Original Accessories, it meets all the relevant technical and legal requirements.
In vehicles with a towing bracket it is possible to remove the ball joint, situated (together with the special assembly instructions) in
the housing for the spare wheel in the vehicle luggage compartment ››› page 75, Vehicle
tool kit*.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power
socket for the electrical connection between
the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer you
are going to use has a 7-pin connector, the
corresponding adaptor, acquired from the
SEAT Original Accessories Catalogue, can be
used.
If a towing bracket is to be retro-fitted to the
car, it must be done according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
Note
Any queries that may arise can be directed to
an authorised SEAT dealer.
184
Trailer weight
Trailer weight
The combined vehicle and trailer must be
balanced. To do so use the maximum permitted towing bracket load. An insufficient
weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the
ball joint of the towing bracket will have a
negative impact upon the response of the vehicle-trailer assembly on the road.
Weight distribution
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible.
Ensure that the objects do not move.
If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer
loaded then the load distribution is incorrect.
However, if these conditions cannot be avoided, drive very slowly.
Tyre pressure values
Correct the tyre pressure in your vehicle to
“total load” ››› page 216, Useful life of tyres.
Trailer weight
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight
under any circumstances ››› page 221, Technical specifications.
The trailer weights listed are only applicable
for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level.
Due to lower air density, engine power decreases depending on the increase in alti-
tude, this also reduces climbing ability,
which requires a reduction of the weight of
the vehicle with a trailer by 10% for every
1000 m increase in altitude. The weight of
the assembly is calculated by adding the vehicle weight (loaded) to the trailer weight
(loaded). Always drive with special care when
towing a trailer.
The towed load and support load information
that is displayed on the towing bracket manufacturers label are only values for the verification of the device. The correct figures for
your specific vehicle, which are usually lower
than these figures, are given in the documentation of your vehicle.
WARNING
● Exceeding the maximum established load
per axle and the maximum towing bracket
load in addition to the maximum permitted
load or the load of the vehicle + trailer assembly can cause accidents and serious injuries.
● A sliding load can considerably affect the
stability and safety of the vehicle + trailer assembly, resulting in accidents and serious injuries.
Towing bracket device
Headlights
Before starting a journey, also check the
headlight beam settings with the trailer
hitched up. Adjust the headlight range settings if necessary ››› page 117, Main light
range control .
Driving speed
For your own safety do not drive faster than
the maximum permitted speed indicated on
the trailer.
At all times, immediately reduce speed if you
detect the slightest swaying movement of the
trailer. Never try to “return the trailer to a
straight position” by accelerating.
Brakes
Brake in due course! If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first and
then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that
can be caused by locking of trailer wheels.
Change to a lower gear in good time before
The coolant temperature can be reduced by
switching on the heating.
● When the vehicle has a factory-fitted anti-
theft alarm and a towing bracket.
WARNING
● Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf-
● When the trailer is electrically connected to
fic conditions.
the vehicle via the towing bracket socket.
● An electrical installation that is connected
● When the vehicle electrical device and the
incorrectly or by non-specialised personnel
can prevent the connection of the current to
the trailer and cause faults in the operation of
the electrical system throughout the entire
vehicle, leading to accidents and serious injury.
towing bracket are operational.
● When the vehicle is locked and the vehi-
cle's anti-theft alarm device is activated.
Once the electrical connection is interrupted
with the vehicle trailer locked, the alarm
sounds.
Always switch off the vehicle anti-theft alarm
device before connecting or disconnecting a
trailer. The vehicle anti-theft alarm device
could cause the alarm to sound ››› page 112,
Anti-theft alarm system*.
Engine overheating
In the event that the coolant temperature
gauge needle moves to the right section of
the scale or to the red area, immediately reduce speed. If the control lamp  flashes on
the general instrument panel, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Wait several
minutes and check the coolant level in the
tank ››› page 208.
Technical data
The trailer is incorporated into the vehicle's
anti-theft alarm system:
Advice
Check whether you can see enough of the
road behind the trailer with the standard rear
vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you
should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.
Observe the relevant statutory requirements
of the country you are in.
Operation
Exterior mirrors
Please observe the following indications
››› page 208, Control lamp.
● All electrical work must be carried out only
by specialised services.
● Never directly connect the trailer electrical
device to the electrical sockets of the reverse
driving lights or other sources of electrical
current.
Emergencies
descending a slope in order to take advantage of the engine brake.
CAUTION
● Avoid corners, and sudden and sharp brak-
ing.
● Once the trailing arm has been removed,
place the corresponding cover on the hole of
the fastening point. This prevents dirt from
entering the hole – see the trailer system assembly manual.
»
Safety
Driving with a trailer
185
Operation
Note
WARNING
● In the event of frequent journeys with a
trailer, we recommend also having the vehicle inspected in between the service intervals.
● Before driving with the ball-headed bar fitted, verify its correct assembly and placement in the clamping bush.
● When connecting and disconnecting the
correctly placed and fixed in the clamping
bush.
trailer, the handbrake must be applied.
● For technical reasons, trailers with LED reverse lights cannot be incorporated into the
vehicle anti-theft alarm system.
Description
● Do not use the ball-headed bar if it is not
● Do not use the towing device for towing if it
is damaged or has missing parts.
● Do not modify or adapt the towing device
connection.
Towing bracket device for trailer
Introduction
If the vehicle is equipped with a towing
bracket device from the factory or is a genuine SEAT accessory, it meets all national technical and legal requirements for towing.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power
socket for the electrical connection between
the trailer and the vehicle. If the towing
bracket is equipped with a 7-pin connector,
you can use the corresponding available
adaptor that is a genuine SEAT accessory.
The towing device has a maximum vertical
load of 50 kg.
186
● Never disengage the ball-headed bar with
the trailer still hitched.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the paint on the
bumper when handling the ball-headed bar.
Fig. 195 Towing bracket device support for
hitching/ball-headed bar.
The ball-headed bar is detachable. It is located in the spare wheel compartment or in the
spare wheel compartment in the boot
››› page 75, Vehicle tool kit*.
Key to ››› Fig. 195
1
13-pin socket
2
Safety flange
Towing bracket device
5
Ball head cover
6
Ball-headed bar
7
Locking balls
8
Centred
9
Red marking on the manual regulator
10
Manual regulator
11
Key
12
Key slot cover
13
Red marking on the manual regulator
14
White marking on the ball-headed bar
Placing in service position
Technical data
Clamping bush cap
Advice
Clamping bush
4
Operation
3
Note
Emergencies
Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you
lose your key.
Fig. 197 Service position.
Before assembling, place the ball-headed bar
in service position.
– Turn key A fully in the direction of arrow
1
››› Fig. 196.
– Hold the ball-headed bar with your left
Safety
Fig. 196 Placing in service position.
hand.
– Pull manual regulator B outward in the di-
rection of arrow 2 and turn it fully in the
direction of arrow 3 .
»
187
Operation
The manual regulator will remain in this position.
Assembly of the ball-headed bar
Service position ››› Fig. 197
● Key C is in an open position – the key arrow points to the “unlocked” symbol. The key
cannot be removed from the key slot.
● The D locking balls may be fully inserted
into the body of the ball-headed bar by applying some pressure.
Fig. 199 Placing the key slot cover.
● The red E marking on the manual regula-
tor points towards the white marking on the
ball-headed bar.
– Remove the cap from the clamping bush 4
● Between the manual regulator and the
– Place the ball-headed bar in the service po-
››› Fig. 195 by pulling downwards.
sition ››› page 187.
body of the ball-headed bar there is a clearly
visible space of approximately 4 mm F .
– Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath
››› Fig. 198 and push it into the clamping
Once the ball-headed bar has been positioned like this, it will be ready to be placed
in the clamping bush.
WARNING
Do not use the ball-headed bar if it cannot be
correctly placed in the service position.
CAUTION
The key cannot be removed from the manual
regulator key slot when it is in the service position.
bush as far as possible until you hear it
click into place ››› .
Fig. 198 Placing the ball-headed bar/locking
and removing the key.
The manual regulator A automatically turns
in the opposite direction, adjusting to the
ball-headed bar ››› .
– Switch off the manual regulator lock with
key B by turning the key fully to the right
in the direction of arrow 1 – the arrow in
the key displays the “locked” symbol.
– Remove the key in the direction of arrow
2
.
– Place cover C over the manual regulator
lock in the direction of arrow
188
3
››› Fig. 199.
– Verify the correct placement of the ball-
headed bar ››› page 189.
Verification of correct placement
WARNING
Only use the towing bracket device when the
ball-headed bar is properly fitted!
WARNING
● Do not hold the manual regulator with your
hand when fitting the ball-headed bar since
you could sustain injuries to your fingers.
Technical data
Towing bracket device
● When mounting the ball-headed bar, al-
Advice
ways lock it with a key and remove the key
from the slot.
● The ball-headed bar must not be in the
CAUTION
When removing the key, always place the
cover over the key slot of the manual regulator to prevent dirt from entering.
ed bar.
Before using the ball-headed bar, ensure it is
correctly fitted.
Ensure that:
● The ball-headed bar does not come out of
the clamping bush in a “jerky” manner.
››› Fig. 200 on the manual
regulator signals toward the white mark on
the ball-headed bar.
● The red mark A
Note
Once removed, place the clamping bush cap
in an appropriate location in the boot.
Operation
service position you will not be able to place
it in the clamping bush.
Fig. 200 Correct placement of the ball-head-
● The manual regulator is adjusted to the
Emergencies
● If the ball-headed bar is not placed in the
ball-headed bar, leaving no space between
them.
● The regulator is locked and the key has
been removed.
Safety
service position with the key in the key slot.
● Cover B has been placed over the manual
regulator lock.
189
Operation
Disassembly of the ball-headed bar
The ball-headed bar should be placed in the
service position so that it is ready to be inserted into the clamping bush ››› .
– Place the cover over the clamping bush 4
››› Fig. 195.
WARNING
● Never leave the ball-headed bar unsecured
Fig. 202 Unblock the ball-headed bar.
– Remove cover A from over the regulator
key slot in the direction of arrow
››› Fig. 201.
1
– Insert key B in the key slot.
– Open the manual regulator lock by turning
key B fully to the left in the direction of arrow 2 . The arrow on the key points to the
“unlocked” symbol.
– Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath
Fig. 201 Remove the key slot cover/unlock
with the key.
››› Fig. 202 and remove manual regulator
C with your other hand in the direction of
arrow 3 .
– Turn the removed regulator fully in the di-
rection of arrow
position.
4
and hold it firmly in this
– Remove the ball-headed bar from the
clamping bush, pulling downward in the direction of arrow 5 .
190
in the boot. It could be damaged in the event
of sudden braking, putting the safety of passengers at risk!
● Never disassemble the ball-headed bar
with the trailer still hitched.
CAUTION
● If you do not turn the manual regulator
fully, it will return to its original position
when the ball-headed bar is removed. The
manual regulator will be stuck to the ballheaded bar and you will not be able to put it
in the service position. Therefore, before you
assemble it again, you must place the ballheaded bar in this position.
● When disassembling, place the cap on the
clamping bush holder’s key slot. This way
you will prevent dirt from entering the clamping bush.
Note
● Before disassembling the ball-headed bar,
we recommend placing the cover on the ball
head.
● Clean the ball-headed bar thoroughly before returning it to the on-board toolbox.
Use and maintenance
Technical data
Towing bracket device
CAUTION
The top part of the clamping bush opening is
lubricated. Be careful not to remove this lubrication.
Operation
If it gets dirty, clean and dry the clamping
bush thoroughly with an appropriate product.
Emergencies
Place the protective cover over the ball head
when storing the bar. This way, you will avoid
getting the boot dirty.
Safety
Before hooking on the trailer, check the ball
head and, if necessary, lubricate it with adequate lubricant.
Advice
Cover the clamping bush with the cap to prevent dirt from entering.
191
Advice
Advice
SEAT dealer, where all jobs required can be
carried out appropriately.
Care and maintenance
Vehicle improvements and modifications
Accessories and modifications
to the vehicle
Accessories, replacement parts and
repair work
If you wish to retrofit accessories in the vehicle, or if a part of the vehicle has been replaced by a new part or technical modifications are required, the following instructions
must be taken into account:
● Before purchasing accessories or spare
parts and before making technical modifications, always request advice from an Authorised SEAT dealer ››› .
● In the event that technical modifications
are carried out on the vehicle, the instructions and regulations specified by the company, SEAT, must be observed.
No damage will be caused to the vehicle if
the established procedures are respected,
which guarantees safe driving and operation.
After the modifications are carried out, the
vehicle will comply with the restrictions and
regulations of the highway code. More information can be obtained at an Authorised
192
The owner must keep the technical documentation regarding the modifications carried out
on the vehicle so it can be handed over to
those responsible for processing end-of-life
vehicles. This ensures end-of-life processing
of the vehicle, while protecting the environment.
Work done on the electrical components and
software can cause disruption in operations.
Due to the interconnection of electronic components, their malfunction can also impair
systems that are not directly affected. This
can adversely affect reliability of the vehicle,
and can produce excessive wear of the parts.
Damage caused by technical modifications
that are not made with the consent of SEAT
will be excluded from the warranty – see warranty certificate.
WARNING
● Jobs or modifications unduly carried out on
your vehicle can cause disruption to operations - Risk of accident!
● We recommend that you use only expressly
authorised SEAT Accessories and SEAT Original Spare Parts for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and compatibility with your vehicle
of SEAT original spare parts and accessories
has been verified.
● Despite the continuous observation of the
market, we cannot judge nor guarantee the
suitability of other products for your vehicle,
be they authorised products or products approved by a state testing facility.
Note
SEAT original spare parts and accessories can
be purchased at authorised SEAT dealers
where the purchased parts can also be fitted.
Modifications and effects of the airbag system
In the adjustment and modification, respect
the SEAT directive.
Modifications and corrections of the front
bumper, doors, front seats, roof or bodywork
must be carried out at authorised SEAT workshops. Components of the airbag system can
be found in these parts of the vehicle.
WARNING
● Airbag modules must never be repaired.
They must be replaced.
● Never fit components of the airbag system
removed from old vehicles or those originating from a recycling process in the vehicle.
Radio and aerial reception
In vehicles factory-fitted with an audio or
navigation system, the aerial may be installed in different places:
● inside the rear window next to the heating
elements,
● on the roof of the vehicle.
Care and cleaning
We recommend you use cleaning products
from the SEAT Original Accessories programme available in SEAT dealers. Please follow the instructions for use on the packaging.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Risk of damage to paintwork.
abrasive household sponges, etc. on painted
surfaces. Risk of damage to the painted surface!
● Always keep car care materials in a safe
● Do not put stickers on the inner side of the
place out of the reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
● When washing the car during the winter
season: Moisture and ice on the brakes may
affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident!
● The ignition must always be switched off
when the car is washed. Risk of accident!
● Do not clean the underside of the car or in-
side the wheel arches without protecting your
hands and arms. You may cut yourself on
sharp metal parts!
● Perfumes and air fresheners inside the ve-
hicle may be harmful to health at high temperatures in the interior.
Introduction
Regular and suitable care helps to maintain
the useful life of your vehicle. This may also
be one of the requirements for upholding any
● Do not use sponges for removing insects or
for car care can damage the health if misused.
● Cleaning products and other materials used
CAUTION
Advice
WARNING
● If washing the vehicle with a hose in winter, do not direct the jet of water directly at
the locks or at the door seals or bonnet. Risk
of freezing.
rear window in areas where heating elements
or the aerial are located. This could cause
damage and, in the case of the aerial, radio
and navigation system reception faults.
Operation
dition to the removal and fitting of parts of
the system in the course of other repair jobs,
parts of the airbag system can be damaged.
Therefore in the event of an accident, this
may cause the airbags to activate incorrectly
or not activate at all.
● Cleaning products containing solvents may
damage the material being cleaned.
● Do not clean the inside of the window with
sharp objects or corrosive or acidic cleaning
products. Risk of damaging the heating elements or the aerial.
Emergencies
● During all jobs on the airbag system, in ad-
warranty claims in the event of corrosion or
paint defects.
● Do not attach any fragrance or air freshener
to the dash panel. Risk of damage to the
dash panel!
● To avoid damaging the parking aid system
sensors, spray them only briefly at a minimum distance of 10 cm when cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure or steam cleaner.
● Do not clean the roof panel with a brush.
Risk of damage to the panel surface!
»
Safety
● The modification of the suspension of the
vehicle wheels, including the use of non-permitted combinations of tyres and rims can alter the operation of the airbag system and increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries in
an accident.
Technical data
Care and maintenance
● Check the colour-fastness of your clothing
to avoid damaging or visibly staining the fabric (leather), upholstery and fabric trim.
193
Advice
For the sake of the environment
● The packaging of the product used to care
for your vehicle is hazardous waste. It must
be disposed of according to current local law.
● Only wash the car in special wash bays.
Note
● Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and other inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similar
stains on the fabric (leather), upholstery and
fabric trim as soon as possible.
● Environmental conditions
The longer substances such as insects, bird
droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and
other aggressive materials remain on the
paintwork, the more damage they do. High
temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight)
further intensify the corrosive effect.
After the winter season, it is important to
have the underside of the vehicle washed
thoroughly.
● We recommend that you visit an authorised
SEAT dealer to clean and care for the interior
of your vehicle, due to the problems that may
arise when cleaning and caring for the interior of your vehicle and to the utensils and
knowledge required.
Your vehicle can be washed in an automatic
car wash.
Washing the vehicle
Before going through an automatic car wash,
be sure to take the usual precautions such as
closing the windows, etc.
The best protection of the vehicle from the
harmful influences of the environment involves frequent washing and waxing. The frequency with which the vehicle is washed depends on many different factors, such as:
● Frequency of use
● Type of parking (garage, underneath trees,
etc.)
● Time of year
● Weather conditions
194
car washes
If the vehicle has special accessories such as
spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial,
etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash
operator beforehand.
The windscreen wiper rubbers must be degreased after going after the car wash and
waxing.
Washing by hand
When washing the car by hand, use plenty of
water to soften the dirt first and rinse off as
well as possible.
Then clean the vehicle with a sponge, glove
or brush. Start on the roof and work down.
Use only slight pressure when cleaning the
painted surfaces of the vehicle. A car shampoo should only be used for very persistent
dirt.
Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and often.
Wheels, sills and underside should be
cleaned last. Use a second sponge for this.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly
and then dry with a chamois.
Washing with high-pressure cleaners
When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, always follow the operating instructions for the equipment. This particularly applies to the operating pressure and the
distance of the spray from the surface of the
vehicle. Do not hold the spray nozzle too
close to the parking aid system sensors and
soft materials, such as rubber hoses or insulating material.
● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the
lens.
Vehicle paint waxing and polishing
● Use a small brush to remove snow and a
de-icer spray to remove ice.
● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod-
uct and a soft, dry cloth.
● Moisten the camera lens using a standard
alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and
clean the lens with a dry cloth.
CAUTION
● When you clean the vehicle with a pressure
washer:
– Stay a suitable distance from the sensors
on the front and rear bumpers.
– Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-
rounding area with the pressure washer.
● Never use warm or hot water to remove
snow and ice from the reverse camera lens,
as it could crack the lens.
To a great extent, good waxing protects the
vehicle surface from the harmful effects of
the environment.
The vehicle must be treated with a high quality, hard wax when water no longer forms
droplets on clean paintwork.
A new coat of high quality, hard wax can be
applied to the clean, painted surface only
when it has fully dried. Even if a wax solution
is used regularly in the car wash, it is advisable to protect the paint with a coat of wax at
least twice a year.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has
lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be
brought back by applying wax.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if
the polish used does not contain wax compounds to seal the paint.
CAUTION
● Never wax the windows.
Cleaning of chromed parts
Clean the chrome first with a clean cloth and
then buff up with a soft, dry cloth. If this does
not clean the chrome properly, use a special
chrome cleaner.
CAUTION
Do not polish the chrome in a dusty environment or it could be scratched.
Damage to the paint
Minor damage to the paint, such as scratches
or stone chips, should be touched up without
delay using paint.
Suitable touch-up brushes or sprays for the
colour of your vehicle can be purchased from
authorised SEAT dealers.
Note
Advice
Care
Operation
Sensors and camera lenses
● Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or
dusty environment.
Emergencies
CAUTION
Do not use water hotter than +60°C (140°F).
Risk of damage to the vehicle!
● Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or on plastic
parts.
Safety
WARNING
Do no use a nozzle that sprays the water out
in a direct stream or one that has a “rotating
jet”!
Technical data
Care and maintenance
We recommend you leave paint damage repairs to a SEAT Authorised Service.
195
Advice
Plastic parts
Exterior plastic parts will come clean using a
damp cloth. If this is not sufficient, plastic
parts can also be treated with special solvent-free plastic cleaning detergents.
Do not use paint cleaners, polishes or wax on
plastic parts.
● Make sure you do not damage the paintwork on the vehicle on removing snow and
ice from the windows and rear vision mirrors.
● Do not remove the snow or ice dirty with
thick particles, e.g. gravel, sand or road salt,
from windows and mirrors. Risk of damage to
the glass and mirror surfaces.
Headlights
Windows and mirrors
Remove snow and ice from windows and rear
vision mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid damaging the surface of the glass, the
scraper should only be pushed in one direction and not moved to and fro.
The windows should also be cleaned on the
inside at regular intervals.
Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry the
windows and rear vision mirrors.
Do not use the chamois used to polish the
bodywork to dry the windows. Waxing and
polishing residues could cause smears on
the glass and hinder visibility.
CAUTION
● Never use hot or boiling water to remove
snow and ice from the windows. Risk of cracking glass!
196
Use soap and clean, hot water to clean the
front headlights.
CAUTION
● Never rub the headlights to dry them and
do not use sharp objects to clean the plastic
glass material. These could damage the protective paint and cause the headlights to
crack.
● Do not use aggressive cleaning products or
chemical solvents to clean the glass. This
could damage the headlights.
Caring for rubber seals
The weatherstrips on doors and windows will
remain pliable and last longer if they are occasionally treated with a suitable rubber care
product. This will prevent premature ageing
and leaks. If they are properly cared for, the
seals will be less likely to freeze up in the
winter.
Door lock cylinder
Special products must be used to defrost
lock cylinders.
Note
● Make sure, when washing the vehicle, that
the least amount of water possible enters the
lock cylinders.
● We recommend the use of products from
the selection of SEAT Original Accessories to
care for the door lock cylinder.
Wheels
Wheel trims
If you wash the vehicle regularly, you should
also thoroughly wash the wheel trim. Regularly remove any brake dust and road salt
from the wheels, otherwise the wheel material could be damaged. Repair any damage to
the wheel paintwork immediately.
Alloy wheels
After thorough washing, treat the wheels
with a protective product for alloy wheels. Do
not use abrasive products to care for the
wheels.
Note
We recommend you leave paint damage repairs to a SEAT Authorised Service.
Vehicle underbody protection
The underside of the vehicle is coated to permanently protect it from chemical and mechanical agents.
Given that damage to the protective coating
during driving cannot be completely ruled
out, we recommend you check the condition
of the protective coating on the underbody
and suspension at regular intervals, preferably before the start and end of the coldest
season of the year.
Cavity waxing
All cavities on the vehicle exposed to corrosion are permanently factory-protected by a
wax solution.
This wax solution does not need to be
checked or touched up. Should wax run out
of the cavities at high ambient temperatures,
remove it using a plastic scraper and clean
away any stains using lighter fluid.
WARNING
Note the regulations concerning safety and
environmental protection if you use lighter
fluid to remove the wax. Risk of fire!
Textile covers and trim parts on doors, boot
lid, etc. can be cleaned with special detergents, e.g. dry foam. A soft sponge or brush
or a micro-fibre cloth for normal cleaning can
be used. Use special products to clean the
headliner.
The dye used in many garments, for example
dark jeans, is not always sufficiently colourfast. Seat upholstery (fabric and leather), especially when light-coloured, may visibly discolour if the dye comes out of clothing, even
in normal conditions. This is not an upholstery defect but indicates that the dye in the
item of clothing is not solid enough.
Heated seat upholstery
Do not clean the seat upholstery with damp
products, as this could damage the seat
heating system.
Clean the upholstery with special products,
e.g. dry foam, etc.
Advice
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion
coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter, particulate filter or heat shields on the
exhaust system. Once the engine has
reached operating temperature, these substances could catch fire. Risk of fire!
Leatherette can be cleaned with a damp
cloth. If this is not sufficient, these parts
should only be cleaned with solvent-free
plastic care and cleaning products.
Operation
CAUTION
Heavy dirt on the wheels could lead to their
misalignment. This could result in vibrations
being transmitted to the steering wheel that
under certain conditions may cause premature steering wear. This dirt must be removed.
Leatherette and upholstery
Emergencies
Moisture, ice and road salt may affect braking
efficiency. Risk of accident!
are aware of the techniques required for their
application. We therefore recommend all
touch-up work or additional anti-corrosion
measures be performed by an authorised
SEAT dealer.
Safety
WARNING
Technical data
Care and maintenance
Authorised SEAT dealers have suitable special products and the necessary facilities and
197
Advice
Natural leather
Leather should be looked after from time to
time, depending on its use.
The leather should be treated regularly
(about twice a year) with a leather-care product.
Normal cleaning
Apply the protective product very sparingly.
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water
and wipe over the leather surfaces.
Dry the leather with a soft, dry cloth.
● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight
Do not let water soak through the leather or
penetrate the seams.
for long periods so that it does not lose its
colour. If the car is left for a prolonged period
outdoors, cover the leather so that it does
not lose its colour.
Removing stains
Remove fresh water-based stains such as coffee, tea, juices, blood, etc. with an absorbent
cloth or kitchen roll. Use the special detergent to clean dried-on stains.
Remove fresh fat-based stains such as butter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with an absorbent cloth or paper towel or use the special detergent if the stain has not yet soaked
through the surface.
Use a grease-dissolving product to treat
dried-in, fat-based stains.
Treat less common stains such as ball-pen
and other inks, felt-tip pens, nail polish,
emulsion paint, shoe cream etc. with a special leather stain remover.
● Preserve the colour of the leather. A special
coloured cream for leather will renew the colour of more heavily worn areas as required.
● Leather is a natural material with specific
properties. During vehicle use, the appearance of parts of the leather covers may
change; folds or wrinkles may appear as a result of their use.
CAUTION
More stubborn dirt
Dry it with a soft, dry cloth.
198
Leather care
● Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as
zips, rivets or belts can leave permanent
scratches and rough marks on the surface of
the leather.
● Use of a mechanical steering wheel lock
can damage the leather surface of the steering wheel.
Seat belts
Keep the seat belts clean!
Wash soiled seat belts with mild, soapy water, removing any heavier dirt with a soft
brush.
Check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
Very soiled belts may not retract properly.
WARNING
Note
● The seat belts should never be removed
● Use a suitable impregnating cream with ultra-violet protection at regular intervals and
after cleaning. The cream will nourish and
moisturise the leather, keep it supple and
able to breathe. In addition, it will also help
to protect the surface of the leather.
from the vehicle for cleaning.
● Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months and
remove fresh dirt as necessary.
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
the belt in question must be replaced by an
Official Service.
● Never clean using chemical products, as
chemical detergents destroy the fabric. Ensure that the seat belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids such as acids, etc.
● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
Checking and refilling levels
Fuel
Refuelling
The correct type of fuel for your vehicle is indicated on a sticker on the inside of the fuel
tank flap, along with the tyre size and pressure ››› Fig. 203 .
Technical data
Checking and refilling levels
Vehicles with a fuel cap with key
– Press the flap in the direction of the arrow
››› Fig. 203.
Advice
1
– Open the cover in the direction indicated
by the arrow
2
.
– Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand
Operation
and unlock it using the ignition key, turning
it anti-clockwise.
– Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and
place it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 203
.
– Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feed
Emergencies
tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic
filler nozzle cuts out ››› .
– Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed
tube and place it back on the pump.
– Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks
Fig. 203 Vehicle as seen from the rear right:
fuel tank flap/fuel tank flap with tank unscrewed cap attached.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 39
into place.
Safety
● Make sure that the inertia reel seat belts
are completely dry before allowing them to
retract.
– Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand
and lock it using the ignition key, turning it
clockwise.
– Press the tank flap with your hand to close
it.
»
199
Advice
– Check that the fuel flap is correctly closed.
Vehicles with a keyless fuel cap (the side
flap will unlock using the central locking system)
– Once the vehicle has been unlocked using
the central locking button, press the fuel
flap in the direction of the arrow 1
››› Fig. 203.
– Open the cover in the direction indicated
by the arrow
2
.
– Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and
place it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 203
.
– Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feed
tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic
filler nozzle cuts out ››› .
– Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed
tube and place it back on the pump.
– Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks
into place.
– Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it
reasons, we do not recommend carrying a
spare canister in the vehicle. The canister
could be damaged in an accident and fuel
may leak. Risk of fire!
CAUTION
● Switch off the auxiliary heater (heater and
independent heater) before filling the tank.
● The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic filler nozzle cuts out. Do not continue filling, as this will fill the expansion chamber.
● Never completely empty the tank! An irregular fuel supply can cause ignition faults,
which can result in damage to a substantial
amount of engine parts and the exhaust system.
● If any fuel is spilt onto the paintwork of the
vehicle, it should be removed immediately.
Risk of damage to paintwork!
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the
manual release of the fuel tank flap. If necessary, request assistance from specialised personnel.
click into place.
– Check that the fuel flap is properly closed.
WARNING
Observe all relevant statutory regulations on
transporting spare fuel canisters. For safety
200
Note
The fuel tank capacity is around 55 litres, of
which 7 litres are the reserve.
Types of petrol
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the
fuel tank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter and must only be run on unleaded petrol. The petrol must comply with European
Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN
51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can refuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of
10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differentiated by their octane rating (RON).
The following titles appear on the corresponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:
Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 octane unleaded petrol
We recommend you use super 95 octane petrol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane
petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95
octanes
You should use super petrol with a minimum
of 95 octanes.
If super is not available, in an emergency you
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In
this case only use moderate engine speeds
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
as possible.
Checking and refilling levels
Petrol additives
The quality of the fuel influences the behaviour, power and service life of the engine.
This is why the petrol you use should carry
suitable additives already included by the
petrol industry, free of metals. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from
building up in the engine.
If good-quality petrol with metal-free additives is not available or engine problems
arise, the necessary additives must be added
when refuelling ››› .
Not all petrol additives have been shown to
be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol additives may cause significant damage to the
engine and the catalytic converter. Metal additives should never be used. Metal additives
may also be contained in petrol additives for
improving anti-detonation ratings or octane
ratings ››› .
● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the
fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Using them may damage the
engine!
● Never refuel with fuels containing a large
proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).
This could damage the fuel system.
● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or
fuel containing other metal additives would
seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic
converter.
● Only use fuel additives that have been ap-
proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or antiknock additives may contain metal additives
that could seriously damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. These additives must
not be used.
● High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with an
octane rating lower than the correct grade for
the engine.
Technical data
● In those countries where unleaded petrol is
not available, you may refuel with a fuel with
a low lead content.
Advice
CAUTION
ber than the one recommended for your engine.
Diesel fuel
Please note the information on the inside of
the fuel tank flap.
We recommend the use of diesel fuel which
complies to European standard EN 590. If
diesel fuel which meets European standard
EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number
(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine
is equipped with a particulate filter, the sulphur content of the fuel must be below 50
parts per million.
Operation
If super is not available, in an emergency you
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In
this case only use moderate engine speeds
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
as possible.
Note
● You may use petrol with a high octane num-
Emergencies
We recommend you use super plus 98 octane
petrol. If this is not available: super 95 octane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen
Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”.
These additives can be bought at SEAT dealers, where information on how to use them
can also be obtained.
Winter-grade diesel
Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it
is more difficult to start the engine. For this
reason, petrol stations in some countries also offer winter diesel with improved fluidity
when cold (winter-grade diesel).
»
Safety
Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 octane unleaded petrol
201
Advice
Water in the fuel filter1)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is
equipped with a fuel filter with a water separator, the instrument panel may display the
following warning:  Water in the
fuel filter. If this is the case, take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop so that
they can drain the fuel filter.
CAUTION
● The vehicle is not designed for the use of
FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would
be damaged if you used biodiesel.
● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called
“thinners”, petrol or similar additives with
diesel fuel.
● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be
necessary to drain the fuel filter more frequently than is specified in the Maintenance
Programme. We recommend having this done
by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed
to collect in the filter, this can cause engine
performance problems.
Engine compartment
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 11
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire
when working in the engine compartment,
e.g. when checking and refilling fluids.
Therefore, always observe the warnings and
follow all general safety precautions. The engine compartment is a dangerous area.
fore, after closing the bonnet always check
that it is properly secured.
● Should you notice that the bonnet is not
safely secured when the vehicle is moving,
stop the vehicle immediately and close the
bonnet properly. Risk of accident!
● Keep children away from the engine com-
partment.
● Do not touch hot engine parts. Risk of
burns!
● Never spill fluids on hot engine compart-
ments. These fluids can cause a fire (e.g. antifreeze in coolant)!
● Take care not to cause short circuits in the
WARNING
● Never open the bonnet if you see steam,
electrical system, especially when working
on the battery.
● Never touch the radiator fan when the en-
smoke or coolant escaping from the engine
compartment. Risk of scalding! Wait until no
steam or coolant can be seen before opening
the bonnet.
gine is hot. The fan may start running suddenly!
● Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition.
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
● Engage neutral in vehicles with manual
● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-
● Never cover the engine with additional in-
gearbox and move the selector lever to position P in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
pansion tank when the engine is hot. The
cooling system is under pressure!
● Apply the handbrake firmly.
● Protect face, hands and arms from any hot
● Wait for the engine to cool down.
● For safety reasons, the bonnet must always
be closed when the vehicle is moving. There-
steam or hot coolant released by covering the
cap with a large, thick rag when opening the
expansion tank.
● Do not leave any objects, such as cloths or
tools, in the engine compartment.
1)
202
Valid for the market: Algeria.
Checking and refilling levels
engine running, there is an extra safety risk
from rotating parts, such as the drive belt, alternator and radiator fan, etc., and from the
high-voltage ignition system. You should also
note the following:
– Never touch the electrical wiring of the
Opening and closing the bonnet
Technical data
● If any tests have to be performed with the
Otherwise this can cause serious malfunctions or engine damage!
● Never open the bonnet using the release
catch. Risk of damage!
For the sake of the environment
Due to the environmentally-friendly disposal
of fluids, the equipment necessary and the
knowledge required, let an authorised SEAT
dealer change fluids during service inspections of the vehicle.
Advice
● When working underneath the vehicle, secure it so that it cannot roll away and support
it safely on suitable supports. The hydraulic
jack is not sufficient for this purpose. Risk of
injuries!
ignition system.
● Observe the following additional warnings
if work on the fuel system or the electrical
system is necessary.
Note
Operation
when wearing jewellery, loose clothing or
long hair. Risk of fatal injuries! All jewellery must be removed, hair tied back and
close-fitting clothing worn.
● Please contact an authorised SEAT dealer
with any doubts regarding fluids.
● Fluids of the correct specifications can be
acquired from the selection of SEAT Original
Accessories.
– Always disconnect the battery from the
on-board network.
– Do not smoke.
– Never work near naked flames.
Fig. 204 Unlocking the bonnet.
»
Emergencies
– Keep away from moving engine parts
– Always keep an approved fire extinguish-
CAUTION
Safety
er immediately available.
● When topping up fluids, make sure the cor-
rect fluid is put into the correct filler opening.
203
Advice
Opening the bonnet
Closing the bonnet
– Open the front left door.
– Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the
– Pull the lever 1
››› Fig. 204 under the dash
panel in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Before opening the bonnet, make sure that
the windscreen wiper arms are not lifted
away from the glass. Otherwise the paintwork may be damaged.
– Pull the release catch in the direction of the
arrow 2 ››› Fig. 204 and the bonnet will be
released.
– Hold and lift the bonnet.
››› Fig. 205
from its fastening in the direction of the arrow and secure the raised bonnet so that
the end of the strut hooks onto the opening
in the bonnet 4 .
– Remove the support strut 3
Fig. 205 Locking the bonnet.
204
support strut keeping the bonnet open and
insert it into its fastening 3 .
– Let the bonnet drop from a height of
around 20 cm into the catch Do not press
down afterwards!
– Check that the bonnet is correctly closed.
Checking and refilling levels
Advice
Technical data
Checking levels
Fig. 206 Diagram for the location of the various elements.
Coolant expansion tank . . . . . . . . . . .
208
Window washer water tank . . . . . . . .
210
3
Engine oil filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
4
Engine oil level dipstick . . . . . . . . . . .
207
5
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
6
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the components
mentioned above. These operations are described in the ››› page 202.
Note
The layout of the engine compartment is very
similar to all petrol and diesel engines.
Radiator fan
The radiator is driven by an electric motor
and controlled according to the temperature
of the coolant.
After the engine has been stopped and the
ignition switched off, the radiator fan may
continue running for around 10 minutes.
Engine oil
Operation
You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical specifications as of ››› page 221.
General notes
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil that can be used all year round.
Emergencies
1
2
Overview
Because the use of high-quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in
the following page should appear on the container of the service oil; when the container
displays the specific standards for petrol and
diesel engines together, it means that the oil
can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change indicated
in the Maintenance Programme, be
Safety
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
»
205
Advice
performed by a technical service or specialised workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine
are listed in the ›››  page 40.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife
service) or fixed (dependent on time/distance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the
Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,
this means that your vehicle has the LongLife
service programmed. If it lists the codes QI1,
QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is
dependent on time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service
intervals*)
Special oils and processes have been developed which, depending on the characteristics and individual driving profiles, enable
the extension of the oil change service (LongLife service intervals).
Because this oil is essential for extending the
service intervals, it must only be used observing the following indications:
● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-
tervals.
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low ››› page 207 and
LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to
206
top up (once) with oil for fixed service intervals ›››  page 40 (up to a maximum of 0.5
litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife
service interval” or it has been disabled (by
request), you may use oils for fixed service
intervals, which also appear in
›››  page 40. In this case, your vehicle
must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1
year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever
comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Programme.
● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine
● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low ››› page 207 and
you cannot obtain the oil specified for your
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil
(once) conforming to the VW 506 00,
VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or
ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an
engine oil that conforms to the corresponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if
needed.
oil level is too low ››› page 207 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,
you can add a small quantity of oil conforming to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3
(petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
The control lamp  flashes red (oil pressure
low)
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The informative display indicates:
The Maintenance Programme states whether
your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate
filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
formation, may be used in diesel engines
equipped with particulate filter. Using other
types of oil will cause a higher soot concentration and reduce the life of the DPF. Therefore:
Control lamp
Oil pressure. Switch off the engine! Instruction Manual!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
check the engine oil level ››› page 207
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is
correct,  do not drive on. Do not even run
the engine at idle speed!
Go to a technical service.
Checking and refilling levels
The informative display indicates:
If the engine oil level sensor is faulty, The
warning lamp  flashes various times after
the ignition is switched on and an audible
warning is given.
Go to a technical service.
Fig. 207 Engine oil dipsticks.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 40
The dipstick shows the engine oil level.
››› Fig. 207.
Checking oil level
– Park the vehicle on a level surface and en-
sure the engine is at operating temperature.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Open the bonnet.
– Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to
flow back to the sump and remove the dipstick.
– Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and in-
sert it again as far as it will go.
CAUTION
Operation
Oil sensor. Workshop!
You should therefore check the oil level at
regular intervals, ideally every time you fill
the tank or before setting off on a long trip.
● The oil level must never exceed area A
››› Fig. 207. Risk of damage to the exhaust
system!
● If the engine oil cannot be topped up under
the given conditions,  do not drive on! Stop
the engine and seek the professional assistance of an Official Service, as this could
cause serious damage to the engine.
Emergencies
The informative display indicates:
Advice
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
check the engine oil level ››› page 207
The control lamp  flashes yellow (oil level
sensor faulty)
the oil level.
It is normal for the engine to consume a certain amount of oil. Depending on how you
drive and the conditions in which the vehicle
is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 litres per 1,000 km. Oil consumption can also
be higher for the first 5,000 km (3000 miles).
Check the oil level!
If the bonnet remains open for more than 30
seconds, the warning lamp switches off. If
the engine oil is not refilled, the warning
lamp illuminates again after 100 km (62
miles).
– Then pull the dipstick out again and check
Technical data
Checking engine oil level
Topping up engine oil
– Check the engine oil level ››› page 207,
Checking engine oil level.
Safety
The control lamp  lights up yellow (insufficient oil level)
– Unscrew the cap from the filler opening.
– Put in the specified grade of oil 0.5 litres at
a time ››› page 205.
– Check the oil level ››› page 207.
»
207
Advice
– Replace the oil filler cap carefully and push
the dipstick all the way in.
acceleration and subjecting the engine to
high loads.
Wait for the engine to cool before opening
the cover.
● Do not touch the fan. The fan can switch on
Changing engine oil
If the warning lamp  (red) is lit up or flashing, the coolant temperature is too high or its
level is too low.
Engine oil must be changed with the frequency indicated in the Maintenance Programme
or according to the service interval indicator
›››  page 30.
CAUTION
Do not mix engine oil with additives. Risk of
damage to the engine! Damage caused by
these products is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
Coolant
Control lamp
If the warning lamp  (blue) is lit up, the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature1). Avoid high engine speeds, hard
208
1) This does not apply to vehicles equipped with an
informative display.
automatically regardless of whether the ignition is switched on.
The informative display indicates:
Check coolant! Instruction Manual!
Checking coolant level
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, check
the coolant level ››› page 208 and refill if
necessary ››› page 209.
If the coolant is situated in the prescribed
area, the high temperature may be due to a
fault in the cooling system fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and replace it if necessary
›››  page 43.
If the warning lamp  (red) remains lit up,
despite both the coolant level and the radiator fan fuse being in correct condition, 
stop the vehicle!
Go to a technical service.
WARNING
● Take care when opening the coolant reservoir. When the engine is warm or hot, the
system is pressurised – Danger of burns!
Fig. 208 Engine compartment: coolant fluid
tank.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 40
The coolant expansion tank is located in the
engine compartment of the vehicle.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Open the bonnet ››› page 202.
Coolant fluid loss
Any loss of coolant normally indicates a leak.
It is not sufficient merely to top up the coolant. The cooling system should be inspected
by an Official Service without delay.
CAUTION
● In the event of a fault that causes the en-
gine to overheat, contact an authorised SEAT
dealer immediately, as this could damage the
engine.
● Anti-freeze that does not correspond to the
correct specification may particularly affect
corrosion protection considerably.
● Faults caused by corrosion may lead to
coolant leaks. Risk of serious engine faults!
– Switch the ignition off.
● If splashed into eyes, rinse immediately
with clean water and seek immediate medical
attention.
– Wait for the engine to cool down.
● Seek immediate medical attention if the
tank ››› Fig. 208 with a cloth and carefully
unscrew the cap.
– Refill the level of coolant.
– Screw the cap on again until it clicks into
place.
Do not use a different type of additive if the
prescribed anti-freeze additive is not available, in the event of an emergency. In this
case, use only water and bring the coolant
concentration back up to the correct level as
soon as possible at an Official Service.
coolant is accidentally ingested.
CAUTION
If the coolant cannot be topped up under the
given conditions,  do not drive on. We recommend contacting an authorised SEAT dealer, as this can damage the engine.
Advice
– Cover the cap on the coolant expansion
Brake fluid
Operation
If the coolant fluid level in the reservoir is too
low, this will be indicated by the  red warning lamp illuminating on the general dash
panel ››› page 208, Control lamp. However,
we recommend checking the coolant level directly in the tank.
Topping up the coolant level
Checking brake fluid level
Always top up with unused coolant.
Emergencies
pansion tank ››› Fig. 208. When the engine
is cold, the coolant should be between
marks B (min.) and A (max.). When the
engine is hot, it may be slightly above mark
A (max.).
Never fill the coolant tank above mark A
(max.) ››› Fig. 208 Excess coolant is forced
out of the cooling system through the overpressure valve in the filler cap of the expansion tank when the engine heats up.
WARNING
● The anti-freeze additive and, therefore, the
entire coolant, are a health hazard. Avoid
touching the coolant. Coolant fumes are also
a health hazard. For this reason, always store
the coolant additive in a safe place out of the
reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
Safety
– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
Technical data
Checking and refilling levels
Fig. 209 Engine compartment: brake fluid
reservoir.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 41
»
209
Advice
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment of the vehicle.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Open the bonnet ››› page 202.
– Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir
››› Fig. 209. It should be between the “MIN”
and “MAX” marks.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Therefore, it
gradually absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. If the water content in the brake fluid
is too high, the brake system could corrode.
The water content also reduces the boiling
point of the brake fluid.
The fluid level drops slightly after a period of
time due to automatic compensation for
brake pad wear. This is quite normal.
The brake fluid must comply with one of the
following standards or specifications:
● VW 50114
However, if the level goes down noticeably in
a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,
there may be a leak in the brake system. If
the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too
low, this will be indicated by the warning
lamp illuminating on the instrument panel 
››› page 153, Control lamp.
● FMVSS 116 DOT4
WARNING
● If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN
mark,  do not continue driving. Risk of accident! Go to a technical service.
● Heavy use of the brakes may cause a va-
pour lock if the brake fluid is left in the brake
system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle.
210
Changing the brake fluid
1) Valid only for certain countries. 5.4 litres for both
versions.
CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.
Windscreen washer
Topping up windscreen washer fluid
Fig. 210 Engine compartment: windscreen
washer reservoir.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 41
The container for the windscreen washer contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or
rear window and the headlight washer system. The container is located in the engine
compartment.
The capacity of the reservoir is approximately
3.5 litres; in vehicles with a headlight washer
system, it is approximately 5.4 litres 1).
Plain water on its own is not enough to clean
the glass and the headlights properly. We
Checking and refilling levels
therefore recommend using clean water with
a glass cleaning product to eliminate any
stubborn dirt (with an anti-freeze additive in
winter).
Battery
Although your vehicle has heated windscreen
washer jets, anti-freeze should always be
added to the water in winter.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 41.
with anti-freeze used for the cooling system
or other additives.
● If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight
washer system, only mix in with the water a
detergent that does not damage polycarbonates.
Note
When topping up the fluid, do not move the
filter from the container opening, as this
could contaminate the fluid hoses and lead to
a windscreen washer malfunction.
Meaning

Always wear safety glasses!

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Always
wear gloves and hearing protection!

Keep open flames, sparks, uncovered
lights and lit cigarettes away when working
on the battery!

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge!

Keep children away from the battery!
Incorrect handling of the vehicle battery
could lead to damage. We therefore recommend all work on the vehicle battery be performed by an authorised SEAT dealer.
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire
when working on the battery and the electrical system. Therefore, always observe the
warnings and follow all general safety precautions.
Technical data
Advice
Symbol
● Do not tilt the battery, as acid could leak
Operation
● Never mix the windscreen washing water
Warning symbols on the battery
battery must be handled with the utmost
care. Wear protective gloves and protect your
eyes and skin when handling batteries. The
corrosive fumes in the air irritate and inflame
the respiratory tract and cause conjunctivitis.
It corrodes tooth enamel. Causes deep and
difficult-to-heal wounds when it comes in
contact with the skin. Repeated contact with
diluted acids causes skin disease (inflammation, ulcers and fissures). When in contact
with water, acids dilute and develop a great
deal of heat.
out of the vapour vents. Protect your eyes
with glasses or a protective helmet! Risk of
blindness! If acid should splash into the
eyes, rinse the affected eye immediately for
several minutes using clean water. Then seek
medical care immediately.
Emergencies
CAUTION
Introduction
● Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin or
clothing with soap solution as quickly as possible and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid
is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately.
● Keep children away from the battery.
● Hydrogen is released and a highly explo-
sive mixture of gases is generated when the
battery is under charge. Sparks when disconnecting or releasing cable terminals with the
ignition switched on could also cause an explosion.
Safety
Ethanol can be used where glass cleaner with
anti-freeze is unavailable. The concentration
of ethanol must be no greater than 15 %.
However, remember that anti-freeze in this
proportion only protects down to -5°C
(+23°F).
WARNING
● Battery acid is very corrosive, therefore, the
»
211
Advice
● A short circuit is produced if the battery terminals are bridged, e.g. using metal objects,
cables, etc. Possible consequences of a short
circuit: melting of lead plates, battery explosion and fire, splashing acid.
● The following is forbidden while working on
the battery: fire and open flames, smoking
and activities that could produce sparks.
Avoid causing sparks when handling cables
or electrical apparatus. Risk of injury in the
event of large sparks.
● Before working on the electrical system,
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical components and disconnect
the cable from the negative terminal (-) of the
battery. To change a bulb, simply switch off
the corresponding light.
● Never charge a frozen or thawed out bat-
tery. Risk of explosion and acid burns! Replace a frozen battery.
● Never use the jump leads on batteries in
which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk of
explosion and acid burns!
its negative terminal (-) first. Only then may
the positive terminal (+) be disconnected.
● When connecting the battery, first connect
the positive terminal (+) and then the negative terminal (-). The battery cables must never be connected to the wrong battery terminals. Risk of burning the electrical installation!
● Make sure the battery acid does not come
into contact with the bodywork. Risk of paintwork damage.
● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight
to protect it from ultraviolet radiation.
● If the vehicle is not used for 3 or 4 weeks,
the battery could run flat. This is because
some components use electricity even in
standby mode (e.g. control units). Prevent the
battery from running flat by disconnecting its
negative terminal or leave it charging at a low
current.
Control lamp
If the  control lamp is illuminated while the
engine is running, the battery is not charging.
Go to a technical service. Have the car's electrical equipment inspected.
CAUTION
Additionally, if the warning lamp  lights up
while driving, the warning lamp  also lights
up (cooling system fault). Stop the vehicle
and switch off the engine – Risk of engine
damage!
Lifting the battery cover
● If you frequently use the vehicle for short
trips, the battery may not fully charge and
could run flat.
● Never use a damaged battery. Risk of ex-
plosion! Replace a damaged battery immediately.
CAUTION
For the sake of the environment
A flat battery is particularly harmful waste for
the environment. It must therefore be disposed of according to current local law.
● Never disconnect the battery when the igni-
tion is switched on, as the electrical system
(electronic components) of the vehicle could
be damaged. When disconnecting the battery
from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect
212
Fig. 211 Battery: Opening the cover.
Note
Replace a battery once it is older than 5
years.
The battery is located beneath a plastic cover
in the engine compartment.
Checking and refilling levels
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical
low, battery must be changed.
Checking the battery electrolyte level
Note
● The battery acid level is also regularly
checked during servicing at authorised SEAT
dealers.
● The electrolyte level on “AGM” batteries
cannot be checked for technical reasons.
● Vehicles equipped with the “Start-Stop”
system include a battery control unit to control the battery level for repeated engine
starting.
● On long daily trips.
● Whenever the vehicle is loaded
››› page 213, Charging the battery.
In vehicles equipped with a battery with colour indicator, the so-called magic eye
››› Fig. 212 changes colour to indicate the
acid level.
equipment.
– For “fast-charging” only: disconnect both
battery connection cables (first the “negative” terminal and then the “positive”).
– Connect the charger cables to the battery
terminals (red = “positive”, black = “negative”).
– Plug in the battery charger and switch on.
– After charging the battery: Switch off the
battery charger and disconnect the cable.
– Remove the charger cables.
Fig. 212 Battery: Electrolyte level indicator.
We recommend you have the acid level regularly checked at an official technical service,
particularly in the following cases.
● At high outside temperatures.
Technical data
● Colourless or light yellow – acid level too
Advice
connected in reverse order.
A fully-charged battery is essential for reliable starting.
Operation
– The positive terminal (+) of the battery is
Charging the battery
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. Therefore, carefully knock the indicator before checking the acid level.
● Black – the acid level is correct.
Winter service
At low temperatures the battery provides only
a fraction of the starting power it has at normal temperatures.
A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures
slightly below to 0°C (32°F).
We therefore recommend you have the battery checked and, if necessary, charged at an
official SEAT technical service before the start
of winter.
– If necessary, reconnect both battery cables
to the battery (first the “positive” cable,
then the “negative” cable).
Emergencies
cated by the arrow ››› Fig. 211.
When charging with a low current (e.g. with a
small battery charger), the battery does not
normally have to be disconnected. The instructions of the battery charger manufacturer must be followed.
Safety
– Open the battery cover in the direction indi-
Use a current equivalent to or lower than
10% of the battery capacity to fully charge
the battery.
Before “fast-charging” the battery however,
both battery cables must be disconnected.
»
213
Advice
“Fast-charging” a battery is dangerous and
requires a battery charger and special knowledge. Fast charges should be performed by
an official technical service.
The battery caps should not be opened while
the battery is being charged.
CAUTION
In vehicles fitted with the “Start-Stop” system, the charger cable cannot be directly connected to the negative terminal of the vehicle
battery but must be attached to the engine
ground point ›››  page 52.
Disconnecting and connecting the
battery
The following functions will either be inoperative or will not work properly after disconnecting and reconnecting the battery:
Function
Installation
Setting the clock
››› page 95
The multifunction display data
is deleted
››› page 97
Note
We recommend having the vehicle checked by
an authorised SEAT dealer to guarantee the
correct working order of all electrical systems.
214
Replacing the battery
A replacement battery must have the same
capacity, voltage, current rating and size as
the original. The appropriate types of battery
can be acquired from authorised SEAT dealers.
We recommend having the battery changed
by an authorised SEAT dealer, where the new
battery will be correctly installed and the
original disposed of in line with regulations.
Automatic disconnection of electrical
equipment
When heavily-charging a battery, the programme selected by the electrical system
control unit prevents the battery from automatically discharging. This may result in the
following:
● Increase in idling speed so that the alterna-
tor can supply more current to the electrical
system.
● The performance of certain electrical com-
ponents could be limited or some may switch
off temporarily, e.g. the heated seats, the
heated rear window, the 12 V power socket.
Note
Despite any measures taken by the control
unit, the battery could drain. e.g. with the en-
gine is switched off, the key is turned in the
ignition for a long period or the side lights or
parking lights are switched on. The switching
off of certain electrical components does not
impair driving comfort and often the driver
will not even notice.
placed immediately.
● Do not use summer or winter tyres that are
more than 6 or 4 years old respectively.
● Wheel bolts should be clean and screw
give maximum grip, therefore you should
drive carefully. Risk of accident!
easily. However, they must never be treated
with grease or oil.
● Never drive with damaged tyres. Risk of ac-
● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
cident!
● Only use wheels and tyres that been au-
thorised by SEAT or your vehicle model. Failure to do so could impair road safety. Risk of
accident!
● Never exceed the maximum speed permit-
ted for your tyres. Risk of accident due to tyre
damage and loss of vehicle control!
● Under-inflated tyres are submitted to great-
er rolling resistance. This means that they
can overheat at high speeds. This can cause
tread separation and even tyre blow-out.
● For driving safety, tyres should be replaced
at least in pairs according to the axle and not
individually. The tyres with the deepest tread
should always be used on the front wheels.
● Never fit used tyres of an unknown age or
prior use.
● Tyres must be immediately changed at the
very latest when they have worn down to the
tread wear indicators.
is too low, they could loosen while the vehicle is moving. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too high, the
bolts and threads could be damaged, leading
to the permanent deforming of the rim support surfaces.
Note
● We recommend having all work on tyres
and wheels carried out by an authorised SEAT
dealer.
● We recommend using wheels, tyres, hub
caps and snow chains from the SEAT Original
Accessories programme.
Advice
WARNING
● During the first 500 km, new tyres do not
● Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
Operation
Introduction
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres increases fuel consumption.
● Incorrectly handled wheel bolts could lead
to a wheel coming loose while the vehicle is
moving. Risk of accident!
● Observe the national legal requirements re-
garding the use of snow tyres and chains.
Emergencies
Wheels
● Worn tyres reduce the necessary grip at
high speeds on damp surfaces. This could
lead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled vehicle
movement – “skidding” on damp surfaces).
CAUTION
● Where a spare wheel that is not compatible
with the wheels fitted is used, follow the instructions ››› page 218.
● The prescribed tightening torque for wheel
Safety
Wheels and tyres
Technical data
Wheels and tyres
bolts on steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
● Protect your tyres from coming into contact
with oil, grease and fuel.
● Replace any lost valve caps immediately.
215
Advice
Useful life of tyres
Tread wear indicator
The base of the side of the original tyres on
your vehicle show 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators ››› Fig. 213. The position of these indicators is given on the tyre sidewalls by the
letters “TWI”, triangular symbols or other
symbols.
The useful life of the tyres depends primarily
on the following factors:
Fig. 213 Side view of tyres with tread wear in-
dicators.
Tyre pressure values
Under-inflation or over-inflation will considerably reduce the useful life of the tyres and
impair the vehicle's handling. Therefore,
check the tyre pressure, including the spare
wheel, at least once a month and before any
long journey.
Inflation pressures for summer tyres are listed on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap
››› Fig. 214. The pressures for winter tyres are
0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) above the summer
values.
Always check the pressure when the tyre is
cold. Do not reduce over-pressure in warm
tyres. The tyre pressures must be altered to
suit notable changes in the load being carried.
Fig. 214 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.
216
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can
be adjusted to medium load to improve driving comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When
driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption may increase slightly.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking all increase tyre wear.
Wheel balancing
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
Various factors encountered when driving
can cause them to become unbalanced,
which results in vibration of the steering
wheel.
The wheel must be rebalanced if a new tyre is
fitted or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect front or rear wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, frequently on one
side, and also impairs vehicle safety. If tyre
wear is very irregular, contact an Official
Service.
Tyre damage
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, only
drive over kerbs or similar obstacles slowly
and at a right angle if possible.
Check tyres and wheels regularly for damage
(punctures, cracks, blisters, deformities,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded
in outside of the treads.
New tyres or wheels
All four wheels must be fitted only with tyres
of the same type, size and the same tread
pattern.
Fig. 215 Interchanging tyres.
Changing wheels around
If the wear is visibly greater on the front tyres,
they should be exchanged for the rear tyres
as shown in the diagram ››› Fig. 215. All the
tyres will then last for about the same time.
To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres
and maintain their optimum useful life, they
should be changed around every 10 000 km.
Tyre width in mm
55
Height/width ratio in %
R
identifying tyre construction letter –
Radial
15
Rim diameter in inches
85
Load rating code
H
Speed rating code letter
The tyres are subject to the following maximum speed limits:
Speed rating code
letter
Maximum speed limit
The correct tyre/wheel combinations specified for your vehicle are listed in its documentation.
Q
160 km/h (99 mph)
R
170 km/h (106 mph)
Understanding the tyre designations makes
it easier to choose the correct tyres. The tyre
designation is marked on the sidewall. For
example.
S
180 km/h (112 mph)
T
190 km/h (118 mph)
195/55 R 15 85 H
This contains the following information:
Advice
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres
should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably
dark location. Store tyres in a vertical position, if they are not fitted on wheel rims.
195
U
200 km/h (124 mph)
H
210 km/h (130 mph)
V
240 km/h (149 mph)
W
270 km/h (168 mph)
Operation
When you remove the tyres, mark them in order to maintain the same direction of rotation
when they are installed again.
Emergencies
Changing wheels
Storing tyres
Safety
Unusual vibration or the car pulling to one
side may indicate that one of the tyres is
damaged. Reduce speed immediately and
stop if you suspect that a wheel may have
been damaged! Check the tyres for damage
(blisters, cracks, etc.). If no external damage
is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the
nearest Official Service and have the vehicle
inspected.
Technical data
Wheels and tyres
The manufacturing date is also indicated on
the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner
side of the wheel).
DOT … 27 12…
»
217
Advice
means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 27th week of 2012.
Follow the instructions ››› page 218 if you
only have a temporary spare wheel.
Spare wheel
Spare wheel location*
Note
If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
spare wheel, there will be a warning sign on
the rim of the wheel.
Fig. 216 Luggage compartment: spare wheel.
The spare wheel is housed in a well under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment
and is secured by a special bolt ››› Fig. 216.
The direction of rotation is indicated by the
arrows on the tyre sidewall. The direction of
rotation indicated must be respected. This
guarantees optimum grip and helps avoid excessive noise, wear and aquaplaning.
Take out the tool box before removing the
spare wheel.
In the event of a flat tyre, a spare wheel with
an undetermined tread pattern or an opposite tread pattern must be used and you must
drive carefully, as in these cases the tyres no
longer offer maximum performance.
The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must be
checked (preferably whenever the tyre pressure is checked – see sticker on fuel tank flap
››› page 216) to ensure the spare wheel remains ready for use.
If the spare wheel is not the same size or design as the tyres that are mounted on the car
(for example if the car has winter tyres or
tyres with direction tread), only use the spare
tyre for a short period of time in the event of
218
It must be replaced as soon as possible for a
wheel with a normal size and finish.
Temporary spare wheel
A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted to
find out whether wheels or tyres of different
sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be
fitted, and to find out about the combinations
allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and
the rear axle (axle 2).
Tyres with directional tread pattern
breakdown and drive with the corresponding
care ››› .
Follow the instructions below when driving
with this wheel fitted.
● After fitting the wheel, the warning sign
must not be covered.
● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph)
with the spare wheel and take great care
while driving. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard
braking and fast cornering.
● The tyre pressure is the same as that of the
standard tyres.
● Only use this spare wheel to reach the
nearest Official Service, as it is not designed
for permanent use.
WARNING
● Under no circumstances must damaged
spare wheels be used.
● If the spare wheel is different in size or de-
sign to the tyres currently fitted, never drive
faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid heavy
acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.
● Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressures
Tyre monitoring systems
Tyre pressure*
The tyre pressure monitoring system uses
ABS sensors to compare the revolutions and
the circumference of each wheel. Should the
circumference of any wheel change, the
warning lamp  on the general instrument
panel will light up and an audible warning
will be heard.
Tyre circumference may change if:
● Tyre pressure is too low
● Tyre structure is damaged
● Vehicle load not evenly distributed
● wheels on one axle are subjected to greater
load, (e.g. driving with trailer, uphill, downhill);
● Snow chains are fitted
››› page 216.
● Switch the ignition on.
● Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy
Connect system with the button  and the
function button Setup ›››  page 21.
The warning lamp  lights up
If the pressure on at least one tyre is significantly lower than the pressure set by the driver, the warning lamp  will light up ››› .
The warning lamp  flashes
If the warning lamp flashes, there is a fault in
the system. Contact a specialised service to
have it fixed.
WARNING
● If the warning lamp  lights up, slow down
● Despite the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem, the driver remains responsible for maintaining the correct tyre pressure. You must
therefore check the tyre pressure often.
Note
Advice
The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must always correspond to the highest pressure prescribed for the model of vehicle in question.
Should the tyre pressure change or if one or
more wheels are changed or the position of
the wheel on the vehicle is changed, e.g.
changing round the front and rear wheels, or
where a warning lamp lights up when driving, the system must be adjusted as follows:
● The tyre pressure monitoring system is not
a replacement for regularly checking the tyre
pressure, as it is unable to recognise an even
drop in pressure.
● The tyre pressure monitoring system is un-
able to warn of a sudden drop in tyre pressure, e.g. a puncture. In this case, try to stop
the vehicle carefully with no severe braking
or steering manoeuvres.
● To ensure the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem works correctly, the basic setting must
be performed every 10 000 km (6000 miles)
or once a year.
● If the battery is disconnected the warning
lamp  lights up when the ignition is switched on. This warning lamp must switch off after covering a short distance.
Operation
Note
Basic system settings
● Under certain conditions (e.g. sporty driving style, driving on loose surfaces or in winter) the warning lamp  may take a while to
light up or may remain switched off.
Emergencies
Follow the instructions given on the temporary spare wheel label.
● One wheel on the axle has been changed
Safety
CAUTION
Technical data
Wheels and tyres
immediately and avoid any severe braking or
steering manoeuvres. Stop and check the
tyres and their pressure as soon as possible.
● The temporary spare wheel is fitted
219
Advice
Winter service
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will significantly improve handling of the vehicle in winter road conditions.
The design of summer tyres (width, rubber
compound, tread pattern) gives less grip at
temperatures below +7°C (45°F), on ice and
snow. This applies particularly to vehicles
equipped with wide section tyres or high
speed tyres (code letters H or V on the sidewall).
In order to preserve the performance of the
vehicle as much as possible, winter tyres
must be fitted on all four wheels, the minimum depth of the tread must be 4 mm and
the maximum age must be 4 years.
You can use winter tyres of a lower speed rating if the maximum speed limit of these tyres
will not be exceeded, even if the maximum
speed limit for the vehicle is higher.
For the sake of the environment
Summer tyres should be fitted again in time,
as they give better handling on roads free of
snow and ice and at temperatures over +7°C
(45°F). Summer tyres have a shorter braking
distance, produce less rolling noise and do
not wear as quickly. They also reduce fuel
consumption.
220
The information in the vehicle documentation
always takes precedence over the information in this Instruction Manual.
All technical specifications provided in this
documentation are valid for the standard
model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Maintenance Programme or the
vehicle registration documents shows which
engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending
whether additional equipment is fitted, for
different models, for special vehicles and for
other countries.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly
used to denote engine power.
rpm
Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm
Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
CZ
Cetane number, indication of the diesel
combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication of
the knock resistance of petrol.
Advice
Important
Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
Fig. 217 Data sticker.
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker ››› Fig. 217 is located
on the boot floor and is also attached to the
Maintenance Programme.
The following information is provided on the
vehicle data sticker:
1
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
2
Vehicle model
3
Identifying letters of the gearbox/number
of the original paint finish/Interior equipment number/engine power/engine
»
identifying letter
Operation
Important information
kW
Vehicle identification data on the data
label
Emergencies
Technical specifications
Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifications section
Safety
Technical data
Technical data
Technical specifications
221
Technical data
4
Partial description of the vehicle
5
Diameter of authorised tyre in inches1)
Type plate
The model plate is located at the bottom of
the B pillar, between the front and rear doors,
on the right-hand side.
The type plate indicates the following
weights:
● Total permitted weight of the vehicle when
loaded
From the difference between the total permitted weight in running order the approximate
carrying capacity can be calculated ››› .
The carrying capacity must include:
● occupants,
● all pieces of equipment and other weights,
● roof loads including the roof rack,
● equipment that is not included in the run-
ning order weight,
● when using the towing bracket, the draw-
bar load (max. 50 kg)
● Maximum authorised weight of the vehicle
with a trailer, when the vehicle operates as a
tractor
● Maximum permitted load of the front axle
● Maximum permitted load of the rear axle
Weight in running order
The weight in running order only has one approximate value. This value corresponds to
the minimum operative weight of the vehicle
without additional equipment that increases
its weight, i.e. air conditioning, spare wheel,
towing bracket.
The running order weight also includes 75 kg
of the weight of the driver and service fluids,
in addition to a fuel tank at 90% capacity.
1)
222
Valid only for certain countries.
Calculating fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to the ECE regulations and
the EU specifications
Calculation of fuel consumption for urban
driving begins when cold-starting the engine.
Then, normal city driving is simulated.
In calculating extra-urban driving fuel consumption, braking and acceleration is done
in all gears, as in daily use of the vehicle.
Driving speed varies within a range of 0 and
120 km/h (75 mph).
The consumption value in combined driving
is composed of 37% of the value of urban
driving and 63% of the value of extra-urban
driving.
WARNING
The maximum permitted weight values must
not be exceeded – Risk of an accident and
damage to the vehicle!
Note
● If you wish to calculate the exact weight of
your vehicle please contact a SEAT dealer.
● Depending on the volume of equipment,
driving style, road conditions, weather conditions and the condition of the vehicle, consumption values can differ from the theoretical values stated here.
Information on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived
from measurements performed or supervised
by certified EU laboratories, according to the
legislation in force at the time (for more information, see the Publications Office of the European Union on the EUR-Lex website: © European Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors
mentioned here, consumption values can differ from those calculated in the current European regulations.
Driving with a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a
fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without
optional extras. The figure quoted includes
75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
Special versions, optional equipment fittings
or retro-fitting accessories will increase the
weight of the vehicle ››› .
WARNING
● Please note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident. Always adjust your speed and driving
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in
the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50
mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100
km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different
in other countries. All data in the official vehicle documentation takes precedence over
these data at all times ››› .
Drawbar loads
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the
ball joint of the towing bracket must not exceed 50 kg.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load
cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and
light-weight single axle trailers or tandem
axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1
metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar
load.
WARNING
● For safety reasons, you should not drive at
speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing
a trailer. This also applies in countries where
higher speeds are permitted.
Advice
or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total
weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, which could
lead to accidents, injuries and damage to the
vehicle.
Operation
● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating
In the interest of road safety, we recommend
that you always tow approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the road will be poor, if the drawbar
load is too small.
● Never exceed the maximum trailer weights
or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle
load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle
may change, leading to accidents, injuries
and damage to the vehicle.
Emergencies
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend
on the equipment/features of each individual
vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road
conditions, traffic conditions, environmental
conditions, load or number of passengers.
style to suit road conditions and requirements.
Safety
The values relating to fuel consumption and
CO2 emissions can be found in the documentation provided to the purchaser of the vehicle at the time of purchase.
Technical data
Technical specifications
223
Technical data
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel
bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can
be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
The tyre pressure values given there are for
cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres ››› .
The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar
(2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer
tyres.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front
wheels.
Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the
tightening torque of the wheel bolts should
be checked as soon as possible with a torque
wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel
and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
● Check the tyre pressure at least once per
month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too
224
low, there is an increased danger of accidents
- particularly at high speeds.
● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Technical
Service for information about appropriate
wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 66 kW (90 PS)
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm)
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
Fuel
66 (90)/4,400-5,400
160/1,400-3,500
4/1,197
Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
Slight power loss.
Ecomotive
186 (5)
186 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds)
7.3
7.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds)
11.3
11.3
Gross vehicle weight
1,616
1,625
Weight in running order (with driver)
Weights (in kg)
1,156
1,165
Gross front axle weight
820
820
Gross rear axle weight
830
830
Permitted roof load
75
75
Operation
Performance
Top speed (km/h)
Emergencies
a)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm
Advice
Engine data
Technical data
Technical specifications
570
580
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8%
Trailer without brakes
1,000
1,000
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12%
900
900
Safety
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
225
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)
a)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm)
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
Fuel
81 (110)/4,600-5,600
175/1,400-4,000
4/1,197
Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
Slight power loss.
Performance
manual
manual
Ecomotive
200 (5)
200 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds)
6.5
6.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds)
9.8
9.9
Gross vehicle weight
1,636
1,645
Weight in running order (with driver)
Top speed (km/h)
Weights (in kg)
1,176
1,185
Gross front axle weight
840
840
Gross rear axle weight
830
830
Permitted roof load
75
75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes
226
590
590
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8%
1,100
1,100
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12%
1,100
1,100
Fuel
81 (110)/5,800
155/3,800-4,000
4/1,598
Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
Slight power loss.
Performance
manual
automatic
Top speed (km/h)
191 (5)
191 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds)
6.7
7.7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds)
10.3
11.5
Gross vehicle weight
1,625
1,665
Weight in running order (with driver)
Weights (in kg)
1,165
1,205
Gross front axle weight
820
860
Gross rear axle weight
840
840
Permitted roof load
75
75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
580
600
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8%
Trailer without brakes
1,200
1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12%
1,000
1,000
Advice
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
Operation
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm)
Emergencies
a)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm
Safety
Petrol engine 1.6 81 kW (110 PS)
Technical data
Technical specifications
227
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 92 kW (125 PS)
a)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm)
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
Fuel
92 (125)/5,000-6,000
200/1,400-4,000
4/1,395
Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
Slight power loss.
Performance
Top speed (km/h)
Ecomotive
208 (6)
208 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds)
6.3
6.4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds)
9
9
Gross vehicle weight
1,677
1,686
Weight in running order (with driver)
Weights (in kg)
1,217
1,226
Gross front axle weight
880
880
Gross rear axle weight
830
830
Permitted roof load
75
75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes
228
600
610
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8%
1,200
1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12%
1,200
1,200
Fuel
4/1,422
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CZ
Performance
manual
manual
Ecomotive
automatic
Ecomotive
Top speed (km/h)
185 (5)
185 (5)
185 (7)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds)
8
8
8.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds)
11.7
11.7
11.8
Gross vehicle weight
1,694
1,694
1,715
Weight in running order (with driver)
Weights (in kg)
1,234
1,234
1,255
Gross front axle weight
890
890
910
Gross rear axle weight
840
840
840
Permitted roof load
75
75
75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
610
610
620
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8%
Trailer without brakes
1,100
1,100
1,100
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12%
1,000
1,000
1,000
Advice
230/1,750-2,500
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
Operation
66 (90)/3,500
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm)
Emergencies
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm
Safety
Diesel Engine 1.4 CR 66 kW (90 PS)
Technical data
Technical specifications
229
Technical data
Diesel Engine 1.6 CR 85 kW (115 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm
85 (115)/3,500-4,000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm)
250/1,500-3,000
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
Fuel
4/1,598
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CZ
Performance
Top speed (km/h)
Ecomotive
201 (5)
201 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds)
6.9
6.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds)
10
10
Gross vehicle weight
1,747
1,752
Weight in running order (with driver)
Weights (in kg)
1,287
1,292
Gross front axle weight
910
910
Gross rear axle weight
870
870
Permitted roof load
75
75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes
230
640
640
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8%
1,200
1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12%
1,200
1,200
Technical specifications
Operation
Advice
Technical data
Dimensions
Fig. 218 Dimensions
C
Wheelbase (mm)
2,602
Length (mm)
4,482
Front/reara) track width (mm)
1,463/1,500
G
Width (mm)
1,715
H
Height at kerb weight (mm)
1,466
Turning radius (m)
10.2
Safety
876/1,004
D
E/F
a)
Front and rear projection (mm)
Emergencies
TOLEDO
A/B
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
231
Index
Index
A
ABS
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
see also Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . 154, 155
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 192
additional electrical appliances (efficiency programme) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Adjusting
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Adjusting the head restraints
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Adjustment
CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Air-conditioning
economic use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 66
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 69
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 37
air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Alternator
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 155
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 76
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 76
Check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Anti-slip regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Anti-theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Armrest
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Aspects to take into account before starting the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ASR
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
see also Traction control system . . . . . . 154, 156
Assistance systems
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Audible signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Audible warning signal
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatic air conditioning
climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Automatic car washes
see Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Automatic gearbox
backup programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
manual release of selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 159
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
B
Back seat
folding down and raising the back seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Ball coupling
disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Blown bulbs
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 205
opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
233
Index
Boot
hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
retaining elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
retaining nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Brakes
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Braking
brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Bulb failure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
C
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Car-care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Care of vehicle
door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
leatherette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
individualised settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
234
keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
locking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 75
subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Changing bulbs
daytime driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Changing bulbs on the number plate . . . . . . . . . . 91
removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Changing bulbs on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
fitting the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
removing the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Changing lights on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Changing oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Changing rear lights on the rear lid
changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
fitting the bulb-holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing settings
CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Changing tail lights (on the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Changing the bulbs
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Changing the rear lights on the rear lid
removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Checking levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Child-proof locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Child seat
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 74
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 73
securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
chromed parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
leatherette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cleaning and thawing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
blower selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Closing
central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
vehicle with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Coming Home and Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Index
Coming Home and Leaving Home Function . . . . 121
Control and warning lamps
alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Controls and displays
General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Controls on the steering wheel
Operating the audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
operating the telephone and audio system . . 102
Cooling system
Checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
engine coolant temperature display . . . . . . . . . 97
topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Correct sitting position
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 174
adjusting the stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
setting the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
temporary deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
turning off the cruise control system . . . . . . . 176
D
Damage to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 14
Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 71
Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Diesel
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Diesel particulate filter
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Direction of rotation
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95
Disposal
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Doors
Child-proof locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Drink holder
centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
rear seat armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 56, 57, 58
Driver information system
CD/radio indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
engine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operation with the windscreen wiper lever . . . 23
Driving abroad
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 223
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
E
E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 99
Economical
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
EDL
see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . 154, 156
Efficiency programme
additional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 115
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 156
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 150
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
automatic gearbox backup programme . . . . . 160
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 75
emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Emergency
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Emergency operation
Front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Emission control system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Engine
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
run-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
235
Index
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Engine and ignition
starting the engine with Keyless Access . . . . . 151
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 202, 205
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Engine fault
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 205
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 208
Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
236
Environment
ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Environmental tip
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 192
ESC
electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Exhaust gas purification system
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Extending
the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Exterior lighting
Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Exterior mirrors
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 6
External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
F
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Filling up the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Front Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Front Assist
City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 180
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
see also Front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . 176
Front Assist monitoring system
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 180
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Front Assist Monitoring System
switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Front passenger front airbag
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Front seat
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
fuel level gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 200
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fuel consumption
Switching off using inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 164
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Full-LED Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Index
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
43
43
81
82
43
43
43
G
Gauge
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
engaging the gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . 156
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 159
General instrument panel
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
GRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
see also Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154
Hand brake
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 121
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Head-protection airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlights
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
HHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Hill hold control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
I
Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 149, 151
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 149, 151
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
selector lever position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 158
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 26
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
instrument panel
service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Interior
lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Interior view
left guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
237
Index
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 75
mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
K
Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Keyless Access
go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Keyless-Go ignition push button needs to be
pressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 110
Keyless Access lock and ignition system:
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Keys
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
L
238
Lever
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 116
automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . 119
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
coming home and Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . 121
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
front fog lights with cornering function . . . . . 120
glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 123
lighting of the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
parking lights on both sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
rear interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Loading the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Locking
central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Locking and unlocking
in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
with the central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Locking the front passenger door manually . . . . . 10
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
automatic lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Category N1 vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
net pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Unlocking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
M
maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
malfunction
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
front assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual air conditioning
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual air conditioning manual . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual gearbox
gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirror
vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multimedia compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
164
164
177
160
146
145
156
124
193
193
221
104
135
N
Net pocket
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
O
Octane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 97
Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
On-screen messages of the instrument panel
Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Open and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Index
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
vehicle, with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
rear lid of the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 10
tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
with the central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Opening manually
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
P
Paint
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Paintwork
Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Parking Aid
adjusting the display and audible warnings . 171
automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Parking aid system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 168
Parking distance warning system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 168
ParkPilot
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 168
Particulate filter
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Particulate filter (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Passenger
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 56, 57, 58
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Petrol
additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . . . 63
Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Positioning seat belts
during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Pre-heating system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Puncture
action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
R
Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 114
see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Rear lights
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Rear seat passengers
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 56, 57, 58
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Rear view mirror
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear view mirrors
adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear window wiper blade
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
opening tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Replacement
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Replacing the battery
of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95
Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Rims
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
239
Index
Roll-back function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rubber seals
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run-in
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
the first 1,500 km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running in
brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
141
142
141
141
196
161
215
161
161
161
S
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
driving safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Safety
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 14
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Safety instructions
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 73
Safety notes
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Saving tips (efficiency programme) . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Seat belt position
for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 64
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 64
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
240
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 64
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 65
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Selector lever
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
selector lever (automatic gearbox)
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Side airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
see also Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 224
Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Start-Stop
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Start-Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 152
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Steering
steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Steering wheel
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Storage
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
in front door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
in the centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
reflective vest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Switch
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Switching off the engine
with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
T
Tailgate locking time extension
see Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
temperature display
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Temperature display
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Temperature selection
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Index
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
lap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 157, 159
Tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tow-starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
correct placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
use and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Transporting items
carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tyre mobility set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tyre Mobility Set
Inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tyre Mobility System
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Tyre pressure monitoring
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tyre Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Tyre repair kit
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . . 49
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
U
Unfasten the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Unlocking
central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
with the central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
V
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . . 110
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 211
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
automatic disconnection of electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
checking electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
lifting the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Vehicle care
car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
cleaning of chromed parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
high-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
paint polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
wheel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 53
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 75
Vehicle underbody
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Vehicle
chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
241
Index
W
Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 98
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 165
hand brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
pressing the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Warning and control lights
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
break recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
deactivation of the airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
disabling airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
gearbox malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Warning symbols
see Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Washing
by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
with high-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
242
Washing the vehicle
things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Wheel
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
loosening and tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 224
anti-theft bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 49, 75
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Wheel trim
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Windows
electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 115
removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Windscreen washer fluid
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Windscreen washer water
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Windscreen wiper
jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 124
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
lifting the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Winter conditions
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Winters conditions
thawing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Winter service
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
disconnecting and connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Wipe interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in certain markets.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
® Because this is a general manual for the
Toledo, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not
included in all types or variants of the model;
they may vary or be modified depending on
the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
>>The section is continued on the follow-
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
Emergency information on a given page
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle except when otherwise indicated.
ing page.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain relevant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
Important warnings on a given page
This manual is divided into six large parts,
which are:
Detailed contents on a given page
1. The essentials
General information on a given page
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
2. Safety
3. Emergencies
4. Operation
5. Tips
6. Technical data
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.16
SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL
SEAT recommends
Castrol EDGE Professional
Toledo Inglés
­­
(05.16)
Inglés 6JA012720BF (05.16)
6JA012720BF
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Toledo
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising